HT45F3Wv140.pdf

R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
HT45F3W
Revision: V1.40
Date: ������������������
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Table of Contents
Features............................................................................................................. 6
CPU Features.......................................................................................................................... 6
Peripheral Features.................................................................................................................. 6
General Description.......................................................................................... 7
Block Diagram................................................................................................... 7
Pin Assignment................................................................................................. 8
Pin Description................................................................................................. 9
Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................11
D.C. Characteristics (Charge Pump & Regulator off).................................. 12
A.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 13
A/D Electrical Characteristics........................................................................ 14
D/A Electrical Characteristics........................................................................ 15
Charge Pump, Regulator and PGA Electrical Characteristics.................... 15
LCD D.C. Characteristics............................................................................... 16
LVR Electrical Characteristics....................................................................... 17
Power-on Reset Characteristics.................................................................... 17
System Architecture....................................................................................... 18
Clocking and Pipelining.......................................................................................................... 18
Program Counter.................................................................................................................... 19
Stack...................................................................................................................................... 20
Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU............................................................................................ 20
Flash Program Memory.................................................................................. 21
Structure................................................................................................................................. 21
Special Vectors...................................................................................................................... 21
Look-up Table......................................................................................................................... 21
Table Program Example......................................................................................................... 22
In Circuit Programming – ICP................................................................................................ 23
In Application Programming – IAP......................................................................................... 24
On Chip Debug Support (OCDS)........................................................................................... 31
Data Memory................................................................................................... 32
Structure................................................................................................................................. 32
General Purpose Data Memory............................................................................................. 33
Special Purpose Data Memory.............................................................................................. 33
LCD Memory.......................................................................................................................... 33
Special Function Register Description......................................................... 35
Indirect Addressing Register – IAR0, IAR1............................................................................ 35
Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1 .............................................................................................. 35
Bank Pointer – BP ................................................................................................................. 36
Accumulator – ACC................................................................................................................ 36
Rev. 1.40
2
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Program Counter Low Register – PCL .................................................................................. 36
Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH ..................................................................... 37
Status Register – STATUS .................................................................................................... 37
System Control Register................................................................................ 39
EEPROM Data memory.................................................................................. 41
EEPROM Data Memory Structure......................................................................................... 41
EEPROM Registers............................................................................................................... 41
Oscillators....................................................................................................... 45
Oscillator Overview ............................................................................................................... 45
System Clock Configurations ................................................................................................ 45
External Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator – HXT............................................................................ 46
External RC Oscillator – ERC ............................................................................................... 47
Internal RC Oscillator – HIRC ............................................................................................... 47
External 32.768kHz Crystal Oscillator – LXT......................................................................... 48
LXT Oscillator Low Power Function ...................................................................................... 49
Internal 32kHz Oscillator – LIRC ........................................................................................... 49
Supplementary Oscillators .................................................................................................... 49
Operating Modes and System Clocks ......................................................... 50
System Clocks ...................................................................................................................... 50
System Operation Modes ...................................................................................................... 52
Control Register..................................................................................................................... 53
Fast Wake – up ..................................................................................................................... 55
Operating Mode Switching .................................................................................................... 56
Standby Current Considerations ........................................................................................... 60
Wake-up ................................................................................................................................ 60
Programming Considerations ................................................................................................ 61
Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 62
Watchdog Timer Clock Source............................................................................................... 62
Watchdog Timer Control Register.......................................................................................... 62
Watchdog Timer Operation.................................................................................................... 63
Reset and Initialisation................................................................................... 65
Reset Functions .................................................................................................................... 65
Reset Initial Conditions ......................................................................................................... 67
Input/Output Ports ......................................................................................... 71
Pull-high Resistors................................................................................................................. 71
Port A Wake-up...................................................................................................................... 72
I/O Port Control Registers...................................................................................................... 73
SCKO Function...................................................................................................................... 74
I/O Pin Structures................................................................................................................... 74
Programming Considerations ................................................................................................ 75
Timer Modules – TM....................................................................................... 76
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 76
TM Operation......................................................................................................................... 76
Rev. 1.40
3
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM Clock Source.................................................................................................................... 77
TM Interrupts.......................................................................................................................... 77
TM External Pins ................................................................................................................... 77
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 78
Compact Type TM – CTM............................................................................... 79
Compact TM Operation ......................................................................................................... 79
Compact Type TM Register Description................................................................................ 80
Compact Type TM Operating Modes..................................................................................... 84
Standard Type TM – STM............................................................................... 90
Standard TM Operation ......................................................................................................... 90
Standard Type TM Register Description ............................................................................... 91
Standard Type TM Operating Modes .................................................................................... 94
Analog to Digital Converter – ADC.............................................................. 104
A/D Overview....................................................................................................................... 104
A/D Converter Data Registers – ADRL, ADRH.................................................................... 104
A/D Converter Control Registers – ADCR, ACSR, ANCSR................................................. 105
A/D Operation ..................................................................................................................... 107
Conversion Accumulation Mode........................................................................................... 107
A/D Input Pins...................................................................................................................... 108
Summary of A/D Conversion Steps ..................................................................................... 109
Programming Considerations................................................................................................110
A/D Transfer Function...........................................................................................................110
A/D Programming Example...................................................................................................111
Digital to Analog Converter – DAC...............................................................113
DAC Operation......................................................................................................................113
Serial Interface – SPI0, SPI1.........................................................................114
SPI Interface Operation.........................................................................................................114
SPI Control Register.............................................................................................................115
SPI Communication..............................................................................................................119
Interrupts....................................................................................................... 120
Interrupt Registers................................................................................................................ 121
Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................... 125
External Interrupt.................................................................................................................. 127
A/D Converter Interrupt........................................................................................................ 128
Multi-function Interrupt......................................................................................................... 128
Time Base Interrupt.............................................................................................................. 128
SPI Interrupts....................................................................................................................... 129
LVD Interrupt ....................................................................................................................... 130
EEPROM Interrupt............................................................................................................... 130
TM Interrupts ....................................................................................................................... 130
SCF Interrupt........................................................................................................................ 130
Charge Pump Interrupt......................................................................................................... 131
Interrupt Wake-up Function.................................................................................................. 131
Programming Considerations............................................................................................... 131
Rev. 1.40
4
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Low Voltage Detector – LVD........................................................................ 132
LVD Register........................................................................................................................ 132
LVD Operation...................................................................................................................... 133
Programmable Gain Amplifier and Switched Capacitor Filter.................. 134
PGA Operation..................................................................................................................... 134
Switched Capacitor Filter..................................................................................................... 135
PGA Control Register........................................................................................................... 136
Sensor Constant Current Generator Circuit.............................................. 138
Constant Current Generator Operation................................................................................ 138
Pressure Sensor Constant Current Control Register........................................................... 139
Charge Pump and Voltage Regulator......................................................... 140
Operation............................................................................................................................. 140
LCD Driver..................................................................................................... 143
LCD Display Memory........................................................................................................... 143
LCD Control Register........................................................................................................... 144
Clock Source........................................................................................................................ 146
LCD Driver Output................................................................................................................ 146
LCD Voltage Source and Biasing......................................................................................... 147
Programming Considerations............................................................................................... 148
VDDSPI Pin Function.................................................................................... 150
Configuration Option.................................................................................... 151
Instruction Set............................................................................................... 152
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 152
Instruction Timing................................................................................................................. 152
Moving and Transferring Data.............................................................................................. 152
Arithmetic Operations........................................................................................................... 152
Logical and Rotate Operation.............................................................................................. 153
Branches and Control Transfer............................................................................................ 153
Bit Operations...................................................................................................................... 153
Table Read Operations........................................................................................................ 153
Other Operations.................................................................................................................. 153
Instruction Set Summary............................................................................. 154
Table Conventions................................................................................................................ 154
Instruction Definition.................................................................................... 156
Package Information.................................................................................... 165
64-pin LQFP (7mm × 7mm) Outline Dimensions................................................................. 166
Rev. 1.40
5
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Features
CPU Features
• Operating Voltage:
♦♦
fSYS = 4MHz: 2.2V~5.5V
♦♦
fSYS = 8MHz: 3.0V~5.5V
♦♦
fSYS = 12MHz: 4.5~5.5V
• Up to 0.33μs instruction cycle with 12MHz system clock at VDD= 5V
• Power down and wake-up functions to reduce power consumption
• Five oscillators:
♦♦
External Crystal – HXT
♦♦
External 32.768kHz Crystal – LXT
♦♦
External RC – ERC
♦♦
Internal RC – HIRC
♦♦
Internal 32kHz RC – LIRC
• Multi-mode operation: NORMAL, SLOW, IDLE and SLEEP
• Fully integrated internal 8MHz oscillator requires no external components
• All instructions executed in one or two instruction cycles
• Table read instructions
• 63 powerful instructions
• Up to 12-level subroutine nesting
• Bit manipulation instruction
Peripheral Features
• Flash Program Memory: 16K × 16
• RAM Data Memory: 512 × 8
• EEPROM Memory: 64 × 8
• Watchdog Timer function
• Up to 29 bidirectional I/O lines
• Two pin-shared external interrupts
• Multiple Timer Module for time measure, input capture, compare match output, PWM output or
single pulse output function
• Two Serial SPI Interfaces
• Dual Time-Base functions for generation of fixed time interrupt signals
• 8-channel 13-bit resolution A/D converter
• One channel 16-bit D/A converter
• Low voltage reset function
• Low voltage detect function
• LCD driver function
• PGA and OPA Modules
• Charge pump and 3.3V Regulator for Analog Circuit
• I/O Power for SPI0 and SPI1
• Package types: 64-pin LQFP
Rev. 1.40
6
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
General Description
The device is an 8-bit high performance RISC architecture microcontroller specifically designed
for Blood-Pressure Meter applications. As most of the functions required to implement a blood
pressure meter application, such as amplifiers, charge pump etc. are integrated within the device,
such applications can be implemented with a minimum of external components. The additional
advantages of low power consumption, I/O flexibility, oscillator options, power down and wake-up
functions, watchdog timer and low cost, enhance the versatility of the device to enable quick and
cost efficient Blood-Pressure Meter applications.
Block Diagram
Watchdog
Ti�e�
Flash/EEPROM
P�og�a��ing Ci�cuit�y
(ICP/OCD�)
EEPROM
Data Me�o�y
Flash
P�og�a�
Me�o�y
Low Voltage
Detect
IAP
Inte�nal
HIRC/LIRC
Oscillato�s
Low Voltage
Reset
RAM
Data
Me�o�y
Ti�e
Bases
Exte�nal
ERC/HXT/LXT
Oscillato�s
8-�it
RI�C
MCU
Co�e
Inte��u�t
Cont�olle�
�enso� Constant
Cu��ent Gene�ato�
�enso� A��lifie�
and Filte�
Cha�ge �u��
and Regulato�
I/O
TMn
�PI0/
�PI1
LCD
D�ive�
LCD
Powe�
13-�it A/D
Conve�te�
16-�it D/A
Conve�te�
Rev. 1.40
7
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Assignment
�EG9
�EG8
PD�/�EG�
PD6/�EG6
PD�/�EG�
PD4/�EG4
PD3/�EG3
PD�/�EG�
PD1/�EG1
PD0/�EG0
PB4
PA0/ICPDA/OCD�DA
PA1/INT0
PA�/ICPCK/OCD�CK
PA�/O�C1
PA6/O�C�
VDD
PA3/XT�
PA4/XT1
V��
PB�/AUD
PC�/�0DO/TP0_0
PC4/�0DI/TP0_1
PC3/�0CK/TCK0
PC�/�0C�/TP1_0
PC1/�CKO/TP1_1
PC0/INT1/TCK1
PA�/VDD�PI
PB3/�1CK/TP�_0/AN3
PB�/�1DI/TP�_1/AN�
PB1/�1DO/TCK�/AN1
PB0/�1C�/AN0/VREF
1
�
3
4
�
6
�
8
9
10
11
1�
13
14
1�
16
64 63 6� 61 60 �9 �8 �� �6 �� �4 �3 �� �4 �3 ��
48
4�
46
4�
44
43
4�
HT45F3W/HT45V3W
41
40
64 LQFP-A
39
38
3�
36
3�
34
33
1� 18 19 �0 �1 �� �3 �4 �� �6 �� �8 �9 30 31 3�
�EG10
�EG11
�EG1�
�EG13
�EG14
�EG1�
�EG16
�EG1�
�EG18
�EG19
COM�/�EG�0
COM6/�EG�1
COM�/�EG��
COM4/�EG�3
COM3
COM�
COM1
COM0
VDDCH/VDD
PC6/CHPC�
CHPC1
VOCHP
VOREG/AVDD
V��/AV��/V��CH
CCVREF
CCVIN
CCVIP
�VIP
�VIN
�CFR
�CFC
�LPF
Note: The OCDSDA and OCDSCK pins are the OCDS dedicated pins and only available for the
HT45V3W device which is the OCDS EV chip for the HT45F3W device.
Rev. 1.40
8
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Description
Pin Name
PA0/ICPDA/
OCDSDA
PA1/INT0
PA2/ICPCK/
OCDSCK
PA3/XT2
PA4/XT1
PA5/OSC1
PA6/OSC2
PA7/VDDSPI
PB0/S1CS/
AN0/VREF
PB1/S1DO/
TCK2/AN1
PB2/S1DI/
TP2_1/AN2
Rev. 1.40
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
Description
PA0
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
ICPDA
—
ST
CMOS ICP Address/Data
OCDSDA
—
ST
CMOS OCDS Address/Data, for EV chip only.
PA1
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
INT0
—
ST
—
PA2
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
External Interrupt 0
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
ICPCK
—
ST
—
ICP Clock pin
OCDSCK
—
ST
—
OCDS Clock pin, for EV chip only.
PA3
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
XT2
CO
—
LXT
PA4
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
XT1
CO
LXT
—
PA5
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
OSC1
CO
OSC
—
PA6
PAPU
PAWK
ST
CMOS
OSC2
CO
—
PA7
PAWK
ST
VDDSPI VDDSPICR
VI
ST
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
Low frequency crystal pin
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
Low frequency crystal pin
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
Oscillator pin
OSC
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high and
wake-up.
Oscillator pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled wake-up.
—
SPI0/SPI1 external voltage input pin
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
PB0
PBPU
S1CS
SPI1C0
ST
—
SPI1 Slave Select
AN0
ADCR
AN
—
A/D channel 0
VREF
ACSR
VI
—
ADC reference voltage input pin
ST
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
SPI1C0
—
CMOS SPI1 Data output
TM2C0
ST
—
TM2 input
ADCR
AN
—
A/D channel 1
PB1
PBPU
S1DO
TCK2
AN1
PB2
PBPU
ST
S1DI
SPI1C0
ST
TP2_1
—
ST
AN2
ADCR
AN
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
—
SPI1 Data input
CMOS TM2 output
—
A/D channel 2
9
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PB3/S1CK/
TP2_0/AN3
PB4
PB5/AUD
PC0/INT1/
TCK1
PC1/SCKO/
TP1_1
PC2/S0CS/
TP1_0
PC3/S0CK/
TCK0
PC4/S0DI/
TP0_1
PC5/S0DO/
TP0_0
PC6/CHPC2
PD0/SEG0~
PD7/SEG7
Rev. 1.40
Function
OPT
I/T
PB3
PBPU
ST
O/T
Description
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
S1CK
SPI1C0
ST
TP2_0
—
ST
—
SPI1 Serial Clock
AN3
ADCR
AN
PB4
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
CMOS TM2 output
—
A/D channel 3
PB5
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
AUD
—
—
CMOS Audio DAC output
PC0
PCPU
ST
CMOS
INT1
—
ST
—
External Interrupt 1
TCK1
TM1C0
ST
—
TM1 input
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
ST
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
SCKOC
—
CMOS SCK output frequency pin
—
ST
CMOS TM1 output
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
PC1
PCPU
SCKO
TP1_1
PC2
PCPU
ST
S0CS
SPI0C0
ST
TP1_0
—
ST
CMOS TM1 output
PC3
PCPU
ST
CMOS
S0CK
SPI0C0
ST
—
SPI0 Serial Clock
TCK0
TM0C0
ST
—
TM0 input
PC4
PCPU
ST
—
SPI0 Slave Select
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
CMOS
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
S0DI
SPI0C0
ST
TP0_1
—
ST
CMOS TM0 output
PC5
PCPU
ST
CMOS
S0DO
SPI0C0
—
CMOS SPI0 Data output
TP0_0
—
ST
CMOS TM0 output
PC6
PCPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
CHPC2
—
—
PDn
PDPU
ST
SEGn
SEGCR
—
—
SPI0 Data input
—
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
If the pull-high is enabled, the pin will be connected
via a resistor to VOCHP. (It is recommended that the
charge pump is enabled to prevent leakage.)
Capacitor connected between CHPC1 and CHPC2
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-high.
SEG
10
LCD SEG0~SEG7 output
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
SEG8~SEG19
SEGn
—
—
SEG
LCD SEG8~SEG19 output
Description
COM0~COM3
COMn
—
—
COM
LCD COM0~COM3 output
COM4/SEG23~
COM7/SEG20
COMn
LCDCTRL
—
COM
LCD COM4~COM7 output for 1/8 duty
SEGn
LCDCTRL
—
SEG
LCD SEG23~SEG20 output for 1/4 and 1/6 duty
VDD
VDD
—
PWR
—
Power Supply
AVDD
AVDD
—
PWR
—
ADC Power Supply
VSS
VSS
—
PWR
—
Ground
AVSS
AVSS
—
PWR
—
ADC Ground
VSSCH
VSSCH
—
PWR
—
Charge Pump negative power supply. AVSS and
VSSCH are bonded together
VDDCH
VDDCH
—
PWR
—
Charge Pump positive power supply. Connected to VDD
in the application
CHPC1
CHPC1
—
—
—
Capacitor connected between CHPC1 and CHPC2
VOCHP
VOCHP
—
—
PWR
Charge Pump output
VOREG
VOREG
—
—
PWR
Regulator output. AVDD and VOREG are bonded
together
CCVREF
CCVREF
—
—
—
VREF output pin – capacitor connected between this pin
and VSS
CCVIP
CCVIP
—
—
—
OPA non inverting input pin
CCVIN
CCVIN
—
—
—
OPA inverting input pin
SVIP
SVIP
—
—
—
Pressure sensor positive input pin
SVIN
SVIN
—
—
—
Pressure sensor negative input pin
SLPF
SLPF
—
—
—
PGA2 input pin
SCFR
SCFR
—
—
—
PGA1 output pin.
SCFC
SCFC
—
—
—
SCF input pin
Note: I/T: Input type O/T: Output type
OPT: Optional by configuration option (CO) or register option
PWR: Power CMOS: CMOS output CO: Configuration option
ST: Schmitt Trigger input
AN: Analog input pin
VI: Voltage input
HXT: High frequency crystal oscillator
LXT: Low frequency crystal oscillator
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage.................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VSS+6.0V
Input Voltage...................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VDD+0.3V
Storage Temperature.....................................................................................................-50˚C to 125˚C
Operating Temperature...................................................................................................-10˚C to 50˚C
Note: These are stress ratings only. Stresses exceeding the range specified under "Absolute Maximum
Ratings" may cause substantial damage to these devices. Functional operation of these devices at
other conditions beyond those listed in the specification is not implied and prolonged exposure to
extreme conditions may affect devices reliability.
Rev. 1.40
11
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
D.C. Characteristics (Charge Pump & Regulator off)
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
VDD
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Operating Voltage
—
IDD1
Operating Current
(HXT/ERC)
3V
5V
IDD2
Operating Current
(HXT/ERC/HIRC)
5V
IDD3
Operating Current
(HXT/ERC)
IDD4
Operating Current
(HIRC+LXT, Slow Mode)
ISTB
Standby current
(LIRC/LXT on)
5V
VIL
Input Low Voltage for I/O Ports,
TCKn and INTn
—
5V
VIH
Input High Voltage for I/O Ports,
TCKn and INTn
3V
5V
3V
5V
3V
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
fSYS=4MHz
2.2
—
5.5
V
fSYS=8MHz
3.0
—
5.5
V
fSYS=12MHz
4.5
—
5.5
V
No load, fSYS=4MHz
ADC disable
—
0.8
1.2
mA
—
2.1
3.15
mA
No load, fSYS=8MHz
ADC disable
—
1.4
2.1
mA
—
2.8
4.2
mA
—
4
6
mA
—
45
70
μA
—
60
90
μA
—
—
5
μA
—
—
10
μA
—
0
—
0.2VDD
V
—
0
—
1.5
V
No load, fSYS=12MHz
ADC disable
No load, fSYS=32768Hz
ADC disable
(LXT on LVR enable)
No load, System halt
Ta=25°C
5V
—
3.5
—
5
V
—
—
0.8VDD
—
VDD
V
VLVD1
—
LVD voltage 2.0V option
2.0
V
VLVD2
—
LVD voltage 2.2V option
2.2
V
VLVD3
—
LVD voltage 2.4V option
2.4
V
VLVD4
—
LVD voltage 2.7V option
2.7
Low Voltage Detector Voltage
-5%
V
—
LVD voltage 3.0V option
VLVD6
—
LVD voltage 3.3V option
3.3
V
VLVD7
—
LVD voltage 3.6V option
3.6
V
—
LVD voltage 4.0V option
VLVD5
VLVD8
IOH1
I/O source current (PA,PB,PC)
IOL1
I/O sink current (PA,PB,PC)
IOL2
PA7 sink current
RPH
Pull-high Resistance of I/O Ports
Rev. 1.40
3V
5V
3V
5V
5V
VOH=0.9VDD
VOL=0.1VDD
VOL=0.1VDD
3.0
+5%
4.0
-2
-4
-5
4
10
2
V
V
—
mA
-10
—
mA
8
—
mA
20
—
mA
3
—
mA
3V
—
20
60
100
kΩ
5V
—
10
30
50
kΩ
12
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A.C. Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
fSYS
fHIRC
fERC
fLXT
fTIMER
Parameter
System clock (HXT)
System clock (HIRC)
System clock (ERC)
System clock (LXT)
Timer input frequency (TCKn)
Test Conditions
Typ.
Max.
Unit
—
400
—
4000
kHz
—
400
—
8000
kHz
Conditions
2.2V~5.5V
3.0V~5.5V
4.5V~5.5V
—
400
—
12000
kHz
3.0V/5.0V Ta=25°C
-2%
8
+2%
MHz
3.0V/5.0V Ta=0~70°C
-5%
8
+5%
MHz
3.0V~5.5V Ta=0~70°C
-8%
8
+8%
MHz
3.0V~5.5V Ta=-40~85°C
-12%
8
+12%
MHz
5.0V
Ta=25°C, R=120KΩ
-2%
4
+2%
MHz
5.0V
Ta=0~70°C, R=120KΩ
-5%
4
+5%
MHz
5.0V
Ta=-40~85°C, R=120KΩ
-7%
4
+7%
MHz
2.2V~5.5V Ta=-40~85°C, R=120KΩ
-11%
4
+11%
MHz
—
—
—
32768
—
Hz
2.2V~5.5V
—
0
—
4000
kHz
3.0V~5.5V
—
0
—
8000
kHz
4.5V~5.5V
—
0
—
12000
kHz
3.0V
—
45
90
180
μs
5.0V
—
32
65
130
μs
—
1024
—
tSYS
1
—
—
μs
tWDTOSC
Watchdog oscillator period
tSST
System start-up timer period
—
tINT
Interrupt pulse width
—
Rev. 1.40
Min.
VDD
Wake-up from HALT
—
13
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Electrical Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
AVDD
VAD
VREF
Parameter
Analog Operating Voltage
A/D Input Voltage
Test Conditions
VDD
—
Min.
2.7
—
Typ. Max. Unit
—
5.5
V
0
—
AVDD/
VREF
V
—
AVDD=3V
2
—
AVDD
+0.1
V
—
AVDD=5V
2
—
AVDD
+0.1
V
-2
—
+2
LSB
A/D Input Reference Voltage
5V
Differential Non-linearity
-2
—
+2
LSB
5V
-2
—
+2
LSB
3V
Regulator & charge pump on,
VREF=AVDD=VOREG, tAD=0.5μs
-2
—
+2
LSB
-4
—
+4
LSB
5V
Integral Non-linearity
VREF=AVDD=VDD, tAD=0.5μs
Regulator on, charge pump off,
VREF=AVDD=VOREG, tAD=0.5μs
3V
INL
VREF=AVDD
—
3V
DNL
Conditions
VREF=AVDD=VDD, tAD=0.5μs
-4
—
+4
LSB
5V
Regulator on, charge pump off,
VREF=AVDD=VOREG, tAD=0.5μs
-4
—
+4
LSB
3V
Regulator & charge pump on,
VREF=AVDD=VOREG, tAD=0.5μs
-4
—
+4
LSB
—
0.5
—
mA
3V
IADC
Additional Power Consumption
if A/D Converter is used
tAD
A/D Clock Period
2.7~5.5V
tADC
A/D Conversion Time
tON2ST
A/D on to ADC Start
5V
No load, tAD=0.5μs
—
0.6
—
mA
0.5
─
10
μs
2.7~5.5V 12-bit A/D mode (ACCM=0)
─
16
—
tAD
2.7~5.5V
2
─
—
us
—
—
Note: A/D conversion time (tADC) = n (bits ADC) + 4 (sampling time), the conversion for each bit needs one ADC
clock (tAD).
Rev. 1.40
14
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
D/A Electrical Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
2.4
—
—
V
—
3
4.5
mA
—
-54
-48
db
—
Max.
Unit
VDAC
D/A Operating Voltage
—
IDAC
D/A Operating Current
5V
THD
Total Harmonic Distortion
—
RES
Resolution
—
—
—
—
16
bit
VO
Output Voltage Level
—
—
0.01
—
0.99
VDD
1kHz sin wave, full-scale
—
Charge Pump, Regulator and PGA Electrical Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
Min. Typ.
Max.
Unit
Charge Pump and Regulator
Charge Pump on
2.2
—
3.6
V
Charge Pump off
3.7
—
6.0
V
No load Ta=25°C & 85°C
3.0
3.3
3.6
V
No load Ta=-40°C
2.7
3.3
3.9
V
Charge Pump off
Regulator Output Voltage Drop
3.7~5.5V Current≤15mA + all circuits which
(Compare with No load)
are powered by the Regulator
—
100
—
mV
Charge Pump on
Regulator Output Voltage Drop
2.4~3.6V Current≤15mA + all circuits which
(Compare with No load)
are powered by the Regulator
—
100
—
mV
VCHPI
Input Voltage
—
VREGO
Output Voltage
—
VREGDP1
VREGDP2
PGA, OP Amplifier and SCF PGA
VADOFF
Input Offset Range
—
VREGO=3.3V
—
500
800
μV
VRFGTC
Reference Generator
Temperature Coefficient
—
VREGO=3.3V
—
50
—
Ppm/C
VICMR
Common Mode Input Range
—
Amplifier, no load
0.2
—
VREGO-1
V
Integrator, no load
1
—
VREGO-0.2
V
Rev. 1.40
15
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LCD D.C. Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
ISTB1
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=144kΩ)
—
30
60
μA
ISTB2
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=72kΩ)
—
60
120
μA
ISTB3
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=36kΩ)
—
120
240
μA
ISTB4
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=18kΩ)
—
240
480
μA
ISTB5
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=192kΩ)
—
25
50
μA
ISTB6
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=96kΩ)
—
45
90
μA
ISTB7
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=48kΩ)
—
90
180
μA
No load, Ta=25°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=24kΩ)
—
180
360
μA
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=144kΩ)
—
45
105
μA
ISTB10
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=72kΩ)
—
90
180
μA
ISTB11
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=36kΩ)
—
180
360
μA
ISTB12
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/3 bias (RBIAS=18kΩ)
—
360
720
μA
ISTB13
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=192kΩ)
—
37.5
75
μA
ISTB14
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=96kΩ)
—
67.5
135
μA
ISTB15
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=48kΩ)
—
145
290
μA
ISTB16
No load, Ta=-40~85°C
VLCD=4.5, 1/4 bias (RBIAS=24kΩ)
—
270
540
μA
210
420
—
μA
ISTB8
ISTB9
IOL
IOH
Rev. 1.40
Standby Current
Only LCD on,
LCD clock=4kHz
—
LCD Common and Segment
Sink Current
3V
LCD Common and Segment
Source Current
3V
5V
5V
VOL=0.1VLCD
VOH=0.9VLCD
16
350
700
—
μA
-80
-160
—
μA
-180
-360
—
μA
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LVR Electrical Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Min.
Conditions
Typ.
VLVR1
LVR enable, 2.10V option
2.1
VLVR2
LVR enable, 2.55V option
2.55
Unit
V
—
tLVR
Low Voltage Width to Reset
—
—
120
240
480
μs
tSRESET
Software Reset Width to Reset
—
—
45
90
120
μs
LVR enable, 3.15V option
LVR enable, 3.80V option
VLVR4
3.15
+5%
V
Low Voltage Reset Voltage
VLVR3
-5%
Max.
3.8
V
V
Power-on Reset Characteristics
Ta= 25˚C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VPOR
VDD Start Voltage to Ensure
Power-on Reset
—
—
—
—
100
mV
RRVDD
VDD Raising Rate to Ensure
Power-on Reset
—
—
0.035
—
—
V/ms
tPOR
Minimum Time for VDD Stays at
VPOR to Ensure Power-on Reset
—
—
1
—
—
ms
Rev. 1.40
17
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
System Architecture
A key factor in the high-performance features of the Holtek range of microcontrollers is attributed to
their internal system architecture. The range of the device take advantage of the usual features found
within RISC microcontrollers providing increased speed of operation and enhanced performance.
The pipelining scheme is implemented in such a way that instruction fetching and instruction
execution are overlapped, hence instructions are effectively executed in one cycle, with the
exception of branch or call instructions. An 8-bit wide ALU is used in practically all instruction set
operations, which carries out arithmetic operations, logic operations, rotation, increment, decrement,
branch decisions, etc. The internal data path is simplified by moving data through the Accumulator
and the ALU. Certain internal registers are implemented in the Data Memory and can be directly
or indirectly addressed. The simple addressing methods of these registers along with additional
architectural features ensure that a minimum of external components is required to provide a
functional I/O and A/D control system with maximum reliability and flexibility. This makes the
device suitable for low-cost, high-volume production for controller applications.
Clocking and Pipelining
The main system clock, derived from either a HXT, LXT, HIRC, LIRC or ERC oscillator is
subdivided into four internally generated non-overlapping clocks, T1~T4. The Program Counter is
incremented at the beginning of the T1 clock during which time a new instruction is fetched. The
remaining T2~T4 clocks carry out the decoding and execution functions. In this way, one T1~T4
clock cycle forms one instruction cycle. Although the fetching and execution of instructions takes
place in consecutive instruction cycles, the pipelining structure of the microcontroller ensures that
instructions are effectively executed in one instruction cycle. The exception to this are instructions
where the contents of the Program Counter are changed, such as subroutine calls or jumps, in which
case the instruction will take one more instruction cycle to execute.


   
   
System Clocking and Pipelining
Rev. 1.40
18
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
For instructions involving branches, such as jump or call instructions, two machine cycles are
required to complete instruction execution. An extra cycle is required as the program takes one
cycle to first obtain the actual jump or call address and then another cycle to actually execute the
branch. The requirement for this extra cycle should be taken into account by programmers in timing
sensitive applications.
  
    
 Instruction Fetching
Program Counter
During program execution, the Program Counter is used to keep track of the address of the next
instruction to be executed. It is automatically incremented by one each time an instruction is ex­
ecuted except for instructions, such as “JMP” or “CALL” that demands a jump to a non-consecutive
Program Memory address. Only the lower 8 bits, known as the Program Counter Low Register, are
directly addressable by the application program.
When executing instructions requiring jumps to non-consecutive addresses such as a jump
instruction, a subroutine call, interrupt or reset, etc., the microcontroller manages program control
by loading the required address into the Program Counter. For conditional skip instructions, once
the condition has been met, the next instruction, which has already been fetched during the present
instruction execution, is discarded and a dummy cycle takes its place while the correct instruction is
obtained.
Program Counter
Program Counter High Byte
PCL Register
PMBP0, PC12~PC8
PCL7~PCL0
Program Counter
The lower byte of the Program Counter, known as the Program Counter Low register or PCL, is
available for program control and is a readable and writeable register. By transferring data directly
into this register, a short program jump can be executed directly. However, as only this low byte
is available for manipulation, the jumps are limited to the present page of memory, that is 256
locations. When such program jumps are executed it should also be noted that a dummy cycle
will be inserted. Manipulating the PCL register may cause program branching, so an extra cycle is
needed to pre-fetch.
Rev. 1.40
19
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Stack
This is a special part of the memory which is used to save the contents of the Program Counter only.
The stack is organized into 12 levels and neither part of the data nor part of the program space,
and is neither readable nor writeable. The activated level is indexed by the Stack Pointer, and is
neither readable nor writeable. At a subroutine call or interrupt acknowledge signal, the contents of
the Program Counter are pushed onto the stack. At the end of a subroutine or an interrupt routine,
signaled by a return instruction, RET or RETI, the Program Counter is restored to its previous value
from the stack. After a device reset, the Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack.
If the stack is full and an enabled interrupt takes place, the interrupt request flag will be recorded but
the acknowledge signal will be inhibited. When the Stack Pointer is decremented, by RET or RETI,
the interrupt will be serviced. This feature prevents stack overflow allowing the programmer to use
the structure more easily. However, when the stack is full, a CALL subroutine instruction can still
be executed which will result in a stack overflow. Precautions should be taken to avoid such cases
which might cause unpredictable program branching.
If the stack is overflow, the first Program Counter save in the stack will be lost.
P ro g ra m
T o p o f S ta c k
S ta c k L e v e l 1
S ta c k L e v e l 2
S ta c k
P o in te r
B o tto m
C o u n te r
S ta c k L e v e l 3
o f S ta c k
P ro g ra m
M e m o ry
S ta c k L e v e l 1 2
Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU
The arithmetic-logic unit or ALU is a critical area of the microcontroller that carries out arithmetic
and logic operations of the instruction set. Connected to the main microcontroller data bus, the ALU
receives related instruction codes and performs the required arithmetic or logical operations after
which the result will be placed in the specified register. As these ALU calculation or operations may
result in carry, borrow or other status changes, the status register will be correspondingly updated to
reflect these changes. The ALU supports the following functions:
• Arithmetic operations: ADD, ADDM, ADC, ADCM, SUB, SUBM, SBC, SBCM, DAA
• Logic operations: AND, OR, XOR, ANDM, ORM, XORM, CPL, CPLA
• Rotation RRA, RR, RRCA, RRC, RLA, RL, RLCA, RLC
• Increment and Decrement INCA, INC, DECA, DEC
• Branch decision, JMP, SZ, SZA, SNZ, SIZ, SDZ, SIZA, SDZA, CALL, RET, RETI
Rev. 1.40
20
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Flash Program Memory
The Program Memory is the location where the user code or program is stored. For this device series
the Program Memory is Flash type, which means it can be programmed and re-programmed a large
number of times, allowing the user the convenience of code modification on the same device. By
using the appropriate programming tools, the Flash device offer users the flexibility to conveniently
debug and develop their applications while also offering a means of field programming and
updating.
Structure
The Program Memory has a capacity of 16K×16 bits. The Program Memory is addressed by the
Program Counter and also contains data, table information and interrupt entries. Table data, which
can be setup in any location within the Program Memory, is addressed by a separate table pointer
register.
000H
Initialization
Vecto�
004H
008H
00CH
010H
Exte�nal Inte��u�t 0
Vecto�
Multi function inte��u�t 0
Vecto�
Multi function inte��u�t 1
Vecto�
Multi function inte��u�t �
Vecto�
014H
ADC Inte��u�t
Vecto�
018H
Multi function inte��u�t 3
Vecto�
01CH
Multi function inte��u�t 4
Vecto�
0�0H
0FFH
100H
3EFFH
3F00H
Look-u� Ta�le (��6 Wo�ds)
Look-u� Ta�le (��6 Wo�ds)
3FFFH
16 �its
Program Memory Structure
Special Vectors
Within the Program Memory, certain locations are reserved for the reset and interrupts. The location
000H is reserved for use by the device reset for program initialisation. After a device reset is
initiated, the program will jump to this location and begin execution.
Look-up Table
Any location within the Program Memory can be defined as a look-up table where programmers can
store fixed data. To use the look-up table, the table pointer must first be setup by placing the address
of the look up data to be retrieved in the table pointer register, TBLP and TBHP. These registers
define the total address of the look-up table.
Rev. 1.40
21
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
After setting up the table pointer, the table data can be retrieved from the Program Memory using
the “TABRD [m]” or “TABRDL [m]” instructions, respectively. When the instruction is executed,
the lower order table byte from the Program Memory will be transferred to the user defined
Data Memory register [m] as specified in the instruction. The higher order table data byte from
the Program Memory will be transferred to the TBLH special register. Any unused bits in this
transferred higher order byte will be read as 0.
The accompanying diagram illustrates the addressing data flow of the look-up table.
A d d re s s
L a s t p a g e o r
T B H P R e g is te r
T B L P R e g is te r
D a ta
1 6 b its
R e g is te r T B L H
U s e r S e le c te d
R e g is te r
H ig h B y te
L o w B y te
Table Program Example
The following example shows how the table pointer and table data is defined and retrieved from
the microcontroller. This example uses raw table data located in the last page which is stored there
using the “ORG” and “rombank” statements. The value at this ORG statement is “1F00H” which
is located in ROM Bank 1 which refers to the start address of the last page within the 16K words
Program Memory. The table pointer low byte register is setup here to have an initial value of “06H”.
This will ensure that the first data read from the data table will be at the Program Memory address
“3F06H” or 6 locations after the start of the last page. Note that the value for the table pointer is
referenced to the first address of the present page if the “TABRD [m]” instruction is being used. The
high byte of the table data which in this case is equal to zero will be transferred to the TBLH register
automatically when the “TABRD [m]” instruction is executed.
Because the TBLH register is a read-only register and cannot be restored, care should be taken
to ensure its protection if both the main routine and Interrupt Service Routine use table read
instructions. If using the table read instructions, the Interrupt Service Routines may change the
value of the TBLH and subsequently cause errors if used again by the main routine. As a rule it is
recommended that simultaneous use of the table read instructions should be avoided. However, in
situations where simultaneous use cannot be avoided, the interrupts should be disabled prior to the
execution of any main routine table-read instructions. Note that all table related instructions require
two instruction cycles to complete their operation.
Rev. 1.40
22
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Table Read Program Example
rombank 1 code1
rombank 1 code1
ds .section ‘data’
tempreg1 db ? ; temporary register #1
tempreg2 db ? ; temporary register #2
:
:
code0 .section ‘code’
mov a,06h ; initialise table pointer - note that this address is referenced
mov tblp,a ; to the last page or the page that tbhp pointed
mov a,3fh; initialise high table pointer
mov tbhp,a ; it is not necessary to set tbhp if executing tabrdl
:
:
tabrd tempreg1
tabrdl tempreg1 ; transfers value in table referred by table pointer to tempreg1
; data at program memory address 3F06H transferred to
; tempreg1 and TBLH
dec tblp ; reduce value of table pointer by one
tabrd tempreg2
tabrdl tempreg2 ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer to tempreg2
; data at program memory address 3F05H transferred to tempreg2
; and TBLH
; In this example the data “1AH” is transferred to tempreg1
; and data “0FH” to tempreg2
; the value “00H” will be transferred to the high byte register TBLH
:
:
code1 .section ‘code’
org 1F00h ; sets initial address of last page
dc 00Ah,00Bh,00Ch,00Dh,00Eh,00Fh,01Ah,01Bh
:
In Circuit Programming – ICP
The provision of Flash type Program Memory provides the user with a means of convenient and easy
upgrades and modifications to their programs on the same device. As an additional convenience,
Holtek has provided a means of programming the microcontroller in-circuit using a 4-pin interface.
This provides manufacturers with the possibility of manufacturing their circuit boards complete with
a programmed or un-programmed microcontroller, and then programming or upgrading the program
at a later stage. This enables product manufacturers to easily keep their manufactured products
supplied with the latest program releases without removal and re-insertion of the device.
The Holtek Flash MCU to Writer Programming Pin correspondence table is as follows:
Holtek Writer Pins
MCU Programming Pins
Pin Description
ICPDA
PA0
Programming Serial Data/Address
ICPCK
PA2
Programming Clock
VDD
VDD
Power Supply
VSS
VSS
Ground
The Program Memory and EEPROM data Memory can both be programmed serially in-circuit using
this 4-wire interface. Data is downloaded and uploaded serially on a single pin with an additional
line for the clock. Two additional lines are required for the power supply. The technical details
Rev. 1.40
23
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
regarding the in-circuit programming of the device are beyond the scope of this document and will
be supplied in supplementary literature.
During the programming process, taking control of the PA0 and PA2 I/O pins for data and clock
programming purposes. The user must there take care to ensure that no other outputs are connected
to these two pins.
W r ite r C o n n e c to r
S ig n a ls
M C U
W r ite r _ V D D
V D D
IC P D A
P A 0
IC P C K
P A 2
W r ite r _ V S S
V S S
*
P r o g r a m m in g
P in s
*
T o o th e r C ir c u it
Note: * may be resistor or capacitor. The resistance of * must be greater than 1k or the
capacitance of * must be less than 1nF.
In Application Programming – IAP
This device offers IAP function to update data or application program to flash ROM. Users can
define any ROM location for IAP, but there are some features which user must notice in using IAP
function.
• Erase page: 64 words/page
• Writing: 64 words/time
• Reading: 1 word/time
In Application Programming Control Register
The Address register, FARL/FARH, and the Data register, FD0L/FD0H, FD1L/FD1H, FD2L/FD2H
and FD3L/FD3H, located in Data Memory Bank 0, together with the Control register, FC0, FC1
and FC2, located in Data Memory Bank 1 are the corresponding Flash access registers for IAP. As
indirect addressing is the only way to access the FC0, FC1 and FC2 registers, all read and write
operations to the registers must be performed using the Indirect Addressing Register, IAR1, and the
Memory Pointer, MP1. Because the FC0, FC1 and FC2 control registers are located at the address of
43H~45H in Data Memory Bank 1, the MP1 Memory Pointer must first be set to the value 43H~45H
and the Bank Pointer set to “1”.
Rev. 1.40
24
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
FC0 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CFWEN
FMOD2
FMOD1
FMOD0
FWPEN
FWT
FRDEN
FRD
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
CFWEN: Confirm the FWEN status
0: Flash ROM write disable
1: software write 1 no action
When this bit is clear by firmware, the IAP controller exits FWEN mode.The user can
read this bit to confirm the FWEN status.
Bit 6~4
FMOD2~FMOD0: Mode selection.
000: write program ROM
001: page erase program ROM
010: reserved
011: read program ROM
101: reserved
110: FWEN (flash ROM write enable) mode
111: reserved
Bit 3
FWPEN: Flash ROM write procedure enable.
0: disabled
1: enabled
When this bit is set to “1” and FMOD2~FMOD0 is set to 110, the program can
execute “Set flash write enable (FWEN)”.
When this bit is set to “1” and FMOD2~FMOD0 is set to 000, the controller will move
register (FD0L and FD0H) data to flash ROM internal page buffer.
Bit 2
FWT: Flash ROM write control bit
0: Do not initiate Flash ROM write or Flash ROM Write process is completed.
1: Initiate Flash ROM write process
This bit can be set by software only, when write process completed, hardware will
clear “FWT” bit.
Bit 1
FRDEN: Flash ROM read enable bit
0: Flash ROM read disable
1: Flash ROM read enable
Bit 0
FRD: Flash ROM read control bit
0: Do not initiate Flash read or Flash read process is completed
1: Initiate Flash read process
This bit can be set by software only, when read process completed, hardware will clear
“FRD” bit.
25
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
FC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
55H: whole chip reset
When user writes 55H to this register, it will generate a reset signal to reset whole
chip.
FC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CLWB
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
Bit 7~1
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 0
CLWB: Flash ROM Write Buffer clear control bit
0: Do not initiate clear Write Buffer or clear Write Buffer process is completed.
1: Initiate clear Write Buffer process.
Before page write action, user must be set CLWB bit to clear Write Buffer.
This bit can be set by software only, when clear Write Buffer process completed,
hardware will clear “CLWB” bit.
FARL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
A7~A0: The flash address[7:0]
FARH Register
Bit
7
6
5
Name
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
A15~A8: The flash address[15:8]
FD0L Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
D7~D0: The first flash ROM data[7:0]
26
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
FD0H Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D15~D8: The first flash ROM data[15:8]
FD1L Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: The second flash ROM data[7:0]
FD1H Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D15~D8: The second flash ROM data[15:8]
FD2L Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: The third flash ROM data[7:0]
FD2H Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
D15~D8: The third flash ROM data[15:8]
FD3L Register
Bit
6
5
4
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
7
D7~D0: The fourth flash ROM data[7:0]
27
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
FD3H Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D15~D8: The fourth flash ROM data[15:8]
Set Flash Write enable (FWEN)
In order to allow user to change Flash ROM data through Flash control register, the user must first
enable the Flash write operation by the following procedure:
• Write 110 to the FMOD2~FMOD0 for setting FWEN mode.
• Set FWPEN bit to 1. The step 1 and step 2 can set simultaneously.
• The Hardware will start a 300μs counter to allow the user writing the correct pattern data to
FD1L/FD1H~FD3L/FD3H. (The clock of 300μs counter is from LIRC.)
• Once 300μs counter is overflow or the pattern is uncorrect. The enable Flash write operation is
fail and the user must repeat the above procedure one more.
• No matter, the operation is success or fail. The hardware will clear FWPEN bit automatically.
• The pattern data is (00H 04H 0DH 09H C3H 40H) to FD1L/FD1H~FD3L/FD3H.
• Once the Flash write operation is enable, the user can change the Flash ROM data through the
Flash control register.
• For disable the Flash write operation, the user only clear CFWEN, it is no need to write the above
procedure.
�et Flash W�ite
ena�le
yes
�et FMOD[�:0]=110 (FWEN �ode)
�et FWPEN=1�
Ha�dwa�e set a counte�
W�tie the following �atte�n to Flash Data �egiste�
FD1L= 00h � FD1H = 04h
FD�L=0Dh � FD�H = 09h
FD3L=C3h � FD3H = 40h
no
Is �atte�n is
co��ect ?
Is counte�
ove�flow ?
yes
�et FWEN �ode fail
FWPEN=0
no
no
FWPEN=0 ?
yes
�et FWEN �ode success.
END
Set Flash Write Enable Procedure
Rev. 1.40
28
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
W�ite Flash
�et Flash W�ite
ena�le
Page E�ase
�et e�ase �age FARH & FARL�
�et FMOD[�:0]=001
�et FWT=1
FWT=0 ?
No
Yes
�et
FMOD[�:0]=000
�et add�ess �egiste�: FARH & FARL
W�tie data to data �egiste�s:
FD0L� FD0H
No
Page W�ite
Finish
Yes
�et
FWT=1
FWT = 0
No
Yes
No
W�ite
Finish
Yes
�et
CFWEN=0
END
Write Flash Program Procedure
Rev. 1.40
29
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Read Flash
�et FMOD[�:0]=011
& FRDEN=1
flash add�ess �egiste�:
FARH=xxh� FARL=xxh
�et FRD=1
no
FRD=0 ?
yes
Read value:
FD0L=xxh� FD0H=xxh
no
Read Finish ?
yes
�et FRDEN=0
END
Read Flash Program Procedure
Rev. 1.40
30
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
ERASE PAGE
FARH
FARL[7:6]
0
0000 0000
00
1
0000 0000
01
2
0000 0000
10
3
0000 0000
11
4
0000 0001
00
5
0000 0001
01
6
0000 0001
10
7
0000 0001
11
8
0000 0010
00
9
0000 0010
01
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Note
FARL[5:0]: don’t care.
On Chip Debug Support (OCDS)
There is an EV chip which is used to emulate the device. The EV chip device also provides an “OnChip Debug” function to debug the device during the development process. The EV chip and the
actual MCU device are almost functionally compatible except for “On-Chip Debug” function. Users
can use the EV chip device to emulate the real chip device behavior by connecting the OCDSDA
and OCDSCK pins to the Holtek HT-IDE development tools. The OCDSDA pin is the OCDS Data/
Address input/output pin while the OCDSCK pin is the OCDS clock input pin. When users use the
EV chip for debugging, other functions which are shared with the OCDSDA and OCDSCK pins in
the actual MCU device will have no effect in the EV chip. However, the two OCDS pins which are
pin-shared with the ICP programming pins are still used as the Flash Memory programming pins
for ICP. For more detailed OCDS information, refer to the corresponding document named “Holtek
e-Link for 8-bit MCU OCDS User’s Guide”.
Rev. 1.40
Holtek e-Link Pins
EV Chip Pins
OCDSDA
OCDSDA
On-Chip Debug Support Data/Address input/output
Pin Description
OCDSCK
OCDSCK
On-Chip Debug Support Clock input
VDD
VDD
Power Supply
VSS
VSS
Ground
31
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Data Memory
The Data Memory is a volatile area of 8-bit wide RAM internal memory and is the location where
temporary information is stored.
Divided into three sections, the first of these is an area of RAM where special function registers are
located. These registers have fixed locations and are necessary for correct operation of the device.
Many of these registers can be read from and written to directly under program control, however,
some remain protected from user manipulation.
The second area of Data Memory is reserved for general purpose use. All locations within this area
are read and write accessible under program control.
The third area is reserved for the LCD Memory. This special area of Data Memory is mapped
directly to the LCD display so data written into this memory area will directly affect the displayed
data. The addresses of the LCD Memory area overlap those in the General Purpose Data Memory
area. Switching between the different Data Memory banks is achieved by setting the Bank Pointer to
the correct value.
Structure
The Data Memory is subdivided into five banks, known as Bank 0 to Bank 4, all of which are
implemented in 8-bit wide RAM. The Data Memory located in Bank 0 is subdivided into two
sections, the Special Purpose Data Memory and the General Purpose Data Memory.
The start address of the Data Memory for the device is the address 00H. Registers which are
common to all microcontrollers, such as ACC, PCL, etc., have the same Data Memory address. The
LCD Memory is mapped into Bank 1. The Banks 2 to 4 contain only General Purpose Data Memory
for the device. As the Special Purpose Data Memory registers are mapped into all bank areas, they
can subsequently be accessed from any bank location.
Bank 0
00H
��ecial Pu��ose
Data Me�o�y
40H� 43H~4�H
in Bank 1
�FH
80H
Bank 1
LCD Me�o�y
9�H
Gene�al Pu��ose
Data Me�o�y
Bank 0
FFH
Bank �
Bank 4
Data Memory Structure
Rev. 1.40
32
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
General Purpose Data Memory
All microcontroller programs require an area of read/write memory where temporary data can be
stored and retrieved for use later. It is this area of RAM memory that is known as General Purpose
Data Memory. This area of Data Memory is fully accessible by the user programing for both reading
and writing operations. By using the “SET [m].i” and “CLR [m].i” instructions individual bits can
be set or reset under program control giving the user a large range of flexibility for bit manipulation
in the Data Memory.

  General Purpose Data Memory
Special Purpose Data Memory
To ensure successful operation of the microcontroller, certain internal registers are implemented in
the Data Memory area. These registers ensure correct operation of internal functions such as timers,
interrupts, etc., as well as external functions such as I/O data control. The location of these registers
within the Data Memory begins at the address 00H. Any unused Data Memory locations between
these special function registers and the point where the General Purpose Memory begins is reserved
and attempting to read data from these locations will return a value of 00H.
LCD Memory
The data to be displayed on the LCD is also stored in an area of fully accessible Data Memory. By
writing to this area of RAM, the LCD display output can be directly controlled by the application
program. As the LCD Memory exists in Bank 1, but have addresses which map into the General
Purpose Data Memory, it is necessary to first ensure that the Bank Pointer bits, BP.2, BP.1 and BP.0
are set to the values “001”, to ensure that the LCD Memory is accessed. The LCD Memory can only
be accessed indirectly using the memory pointer MP1 and the indirect addressing register IAR1.
Rev. 1.40
33
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
  
  
          
  
  
  
   
    
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
­€ ‚ ƒ €  „  …†  ‡  ‡  ˆ ˆ
Special Purpose Data Memory
Rev. 1.40
34
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Special Function Register Description
Most of the Special Function Register details will be described in the relevant functional sections;
however several registers require a separate description in this section.
Indirect Addressing Register – IAR0, IAR1
The Indirect Addressing Registers, IAR0 and IAR1, although having their locations in normal RAM
register space, do not actually physically exist as normal registers. The method of indirect addressing
for RAM data manipulation uses these Indirect Addressing Registers and Memory Pointers, in
contrast to direct memory addressing, where the actual memory address is specified. Actions on the
IAR0 and IAR1 registers will result in no actual read or write operation to these registers but rather
to the memory location specified by their corresponding Memory Pointers, MP0 or MP1. Acting as a
pair, IAR0 and MP0 can together access data from Bank 0 while the IAR1 and MP1 register pair can
access data from any bank. As the Indirect Addressing Registers are not physically implemented,
reading the Indirect Addressing Registers indirectly will return a result of “00H” and writing to the
registers indirectly will result in no operation.
Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1
Two Memory Pointers, known as MP0 and MP1 are provided. These Memory Pointers are
physically implemented in the Data Memory and can be manipulated in the same way as normal
registers providing a convenient way with which to address and track data. When any operation to
the relevant Indirect Addressing Registers is carried out, the actual address that the microcontroller
is directed to, is the address specified by the related Memory Pointer. MP0, together with Indirect
Addressing Register, IAR0, are used to access data from Bank 0, while MP1 and IAR1 are used to
access data from all banks according to BP register. Direct Addressing can only be used with Bank 0,
all other Banks must be addressed indirectly using MP1 and IAR1.
Indirect Addressing Program Example
data.section ‘data’
adres1 db?
adres2 db?
adres3 db?
adres4 db?
block db?
code.section at 0 code
org 00h
start:
mov a, 04h; setup size of block
mov block, a
mov a, offset adres1 ; Accumulator loaded with first RAM address
mov mp0, a ; setup memory pointer with first RAM address
loop:
clr IAR0 ; clear the data at address defined by MP0
inc mp0; increment memory pointer
sdz block ; check if last memory location has been cleared
jmp loop
continue:
The important point to note here is that in the example shown above, no reference is made to specific
Data Memory addresses.
Rev. 1.40
35
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bank Pointer – BP
The Program and Data Memory are divided into several banks. Selecting the required Program and
Data Memory area is achieved using the Bank Pointer. Bit 5 of the Bank Pointer is used to select
Program Memory Banks 0~1, while bits 0~2 are used to select Data Memory Banks 0~4.
The Data Memory is initialised to Bank 0 after a reset, except for a WDT time-out reset in the Power
Down Mode, in which case, the Data Memory bank remains unaffected. It should be noted that the
Special Function Data Memory is not affected by the bank selection, which means that the Special
Function Registers can be accessed from within any bank. Directly addressing the Data Memory
will always result in Bank 0 being accessed irrespective of the value of the Bank Pointer. Accessing
data from banks other than Bank 0 must be implemented using Indirect addressing.
As both the Program Memory and Data Memory share the same Bank Pointer Register, care must be
taken during programming.
BP Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
PMBP0
—
—
DMBP2
DMBP1
DMBP0
R/W
—
—
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
—
—
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5
PMBP0: Select Program Memory Banks
0: Bank 0, Program Memory Address is from 0000H ~ 1FFFH
1: Bank 1, Program Memory Address is from 2000H ~ 3FFFH
Bit 4~3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2~0
DMBP2~DMBP0: Select Data Memory Banks
000: Bank 0
001: Bank 1
010: Bank 2
011: Bank 3
100: Bank 4
110~111: Undefined
Accumulator – ACC
The Accumulator is central to the operation of any microcontroller and is closely related with
operations carried out by the ALU. The Accumulator is the place where all intermediate results
from the ALU are stored. Without the Accumulator it would be necessary to write the result of
each calculation or logical operation such as addition, subtraction, shift, etc., to the Data Memory
resulting in higher programming and timing overheads. Data transfer operations usually involve
the temporary storage function of the Accumulator; for example, when transferring data between
one user defined register and another, it is necessary to do this by passing the data through the
Accumulator as no direct transfer between two registers is permitted.
Program Counter Low Register – PCL
To provide additional program control functions, the low byte of the Program Counter is made
accessible to programmers by locating it within the Special Purpose area of the Data Memory. By
manipulating this register, direct jumps to other program locations are easily implemented. Loading
a value directly into this PCL register will cause a jump to the specified Program Memory location,
however, as the register is only 8-bit wide, only jumps within the current Program Memory page are
permitted. When such operations are used, note that a dummy cycle will be inserted.
Rev. 1.40
36
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH
These three special function registers are used to control operation of the look-up table which is
stored in the Program Memory. TBLP and TBHP are the table pointer and indicates the location
where the table data is located. Their value must be setup before any table read commands are
executed. Their value can be changed, for example using the “INC” or “DEC” instructions, allowing
for easy table data pointing and reading. TBLH is the location where the high order byte of the table
data is stored after a table read data instruction has been executed. Note that the lower order table
data byte is transferred to a user defined location.
Status Register – STATUS
This 8-bit register contains the zero flag (Z), carry flag (C), auxiliary carry flag (AC), overflow flag
(OV), power down flag (PDF), and watchdog time-out flag (TO). These arithmetic/logical operation
and system management flags are used to record the status and operation of the microcontroller.
With the exception of the TO and PDF flags, bits in the status register can be altered by instructions
like most other registers. Any data written into the status register will not change the TO or PDF flag.
In addition, operations related to the status register may give different results due to the different
instruction operations. The TO flag can be affected only by a system power-up, a WDT time-out or
by executing the “CLR WDT” or “HALT” instruction. The PDF flag is affected only by executing
the “HALT” or “CLR WDT” instruction or during a system power-up.
The Z, OV, AC and C flags generally reflect the status of the latest operations.
• C is set if an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take
place during a subtraction operation; otherwise C is cleared. C is also affected by a rotate through
carry instruction.
• AC is set if an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from
the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction; otherwise AC is cleared.
• Z is set if the result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero; otherwise Z is cleared.
• OV is set if an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit, or vice versa; otherwise OV is cleared.
• PDF is cleared by a system power-up or executing the “CLR WDT” instruction. PDF is set by
executing the “HALT” instruction.
• TO is cleared by a system power-up or executing the “CLR WDT” or “HALT” instruction. TO is
set by a WDT time-out.
In addition, on entering an interrupt sequence or executing a subroutine call, the status register will
not be pushed onto the stack automatically. If the contents of the status registers are important and if
the subroutine can corrupt the status register, precautions must be taken to correctly save it.
Rev. 1.40
37
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
STATUS Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
TO
PDF
OV
Z
AC
C
R/W
—
—
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
x
x
x
x
“x” unknown
Rev. 1.40
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5
TO: Watchdog Time-Out flag
0: After power up or executing the “CLR WDT” or “HALT” instruction
1: A watchdog time-out occurred.
Bit 4
PDF: Power down flag
0: After power up or executing the “CLR WDT” instruction
1: By executing the “HALT” instruction
Bit 3
OV: Overflow flag
0: no overflow
1: an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the highest-order bit or vice versa.
Bit 2
Z: Zero flag
0: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is not zero
1: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero
Bit 1
AC: Auxiliary flag
0: no auxiliary carry
1: an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction
Bit 0
C: Carry flag
0: no carry-out
1: an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not
take place during a subtraction operation
C is also affected by a rotate through carry instruction.
38
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
System Control Register
CTRL1 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
TPIOS2
TPIOS1
TPIOS0
TPOS2
TPOS1
TPOS0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5
TPIOS2: output selection of I/O and TP2_0/TP2_1
0: Normal I/O
1: TP2_0/TP2_1 (timer function)
Bit 4
TPIOS1: output selection of I/O and TP1_0/TP1_1
0: Normal I/O
1: TP1_0/TP1_1 (timer function)
Bit 3
TPIOS0: output selection of I/O and TP0_0/TP0_1
0: Normal I/O
1: TP0_0/TP0_1 (timer function)
Bit 2
TPOS2: output selection of TP2_0 and TP2_1
0: TP2_0
1: TP2_1
Bit 1
TPOS1: output selection of TP1_0 and TP1_1
0: TP1_0
1: TP1_1
Bit 0
TPOS0: output selection of TP0_0 and TP0_1
0: TP0_0
1: TP0_1
Note: 1. Priority of Pin Sharing Functions: SPI > Timer > I/O
2. Procedure for SPI Pin Sharing Functions: SPI0EN=1 or SPI1EN=1
3. Procedure for Timer Pin Sharing Functions: SPI0EN=0 or SPI1EN=0, and TPIOS0=1 or TPIOS1=1 or TPIOS2=1 (Note: When TPIOS0 is set to 1, the output of timer is TP0_1. The pin TP0_0 could be SPI or I/O functions. If TP0_0 be used SPI function, the SPI0EN is set to 1.)
39
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTRL2 Register
Bit
7
6
Name
DACEN
CPDEN
5
4
3
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
CPF
—
R/W
R
—
0
0
—
INT1ES1 INT1ES0 INT0ES1 INT0ES0
Bit 7
DACEN: DAC disable/enable control
0: DAC disable 1: DAC enable
The DAC circuit is disabled when system enters the HALT mode.
Bit 6
CPDEN: Charge pump input voltage detector circuit disable/enable control
0: disable 1: enable
If CPDEN=0, the Charge pump voltage input detector circuit is disabled, CPF will
remain at 0, and the detector circuit consumes no power.
Bit 5~4
INT1ES1, INT1ES0: external interrupt 1 edge selection
00: disable
01: rising edge trigger
10: falling edge trigger
11: dual edge trigger
Bit 3~2
INT0ES1, INT0ES0: external interrupt 0 edge selection
00: disable
01: rising edge trigger
10: falling edge trigger
11: dual edge trigger
Bit 1
CPF: Charge pump input voltage detector flag
0: Charge pump input voltage is above 3.8V
1: Charge pump input voltage is equal to or under 3.8V
When CPDEN and REGCEN are enabled, the CPF will be working.
Bit 0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
CTRL3 Register
Bit
Name
Rev. 1.40
7
6
5
4
3
SCFVREF4 SCFVREF3 SCFVREF2 SCFVREF1 SCFVREF0
2
1
0
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
POR
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
Bit 7~3
SCFVREF4~SCFVREF0: SCF Offset Voltage selected
SCF Offset Voltage = ([SCFVREF4:0] / 32) * VOREG
Bit 2~0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
40
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
EEPROM Data memory
This device contains an area of internal EEPROM Data Memory. EEPROM, which stands for
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory, is by its nature a non-volatile form
of re-programmable memory, with data retention even when its power supply is removed. By
incorporating this kind of data memory, a whole new host of application possibilities are made
available to the designer. The availability of EEPROM storage allows information such as product
identification numbers, calibration values, specific user data, system setup data or other product
information to be stored directly within the product microcontroller. The process of reading and
writing data to the EEPROM memory has been reduced to a very trivial affair.
EEPROM Data Memory Structure
The EEPROM Data Memory capacity is 64x8 bits for the device. Unlike the Program Memory
and RAM Data Memory, the EEPROM Data Memory is not directly mapped into memory space
and is therefore not directly addressable in the same way as the other types of memory. Read and
Write operations to the EEPROM are carried out in single byte operations using an address and data
register in Bank 0 and a single control register in Bank 1.
EEPROM Registers
Three registers control the overall operation of the internal EEPROM Data Memory. These are the
address register, EEA, the data register, EED and a single control register, EEC. As both the EEA and
EED registers are located in Bank 0, they can be directly accessed in the same was as any other Special
Function Register. The EEC register however, being located in Bank1, cannot be directly addressed
directly and can only be read from or written to indirectly using the MP1 Memory Pointer and Indirect
Addressing Register, IAR1. Because the EEC control register is located at address 40H in Bank 1, the
MP1 Memory Pointer must first be set to the value 40H and the Bank Pointer register, BP, set to the
value, 01H, before any operations on the EEC register are executed.
EEPROM Register List
Name
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EEA
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
EED
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
EEC
—
—
—
—
WREN
WR
RDEN
RD
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
x
x
x
x
x
x
EEA Register
“x” unknown
Rev. 1.40
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5~0
D5~D0: Data EEPROM address
Data EEPROM address bit 5 ~ bit 0
41
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
EED Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
“x” unknown
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: Data EEPROM data
Data EEPROM data bit 7 ~ bit 0
EEC Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
WREN
WR
RDEN
RD
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3
WREN: Data EEPROM Write Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Data EEPROM Write Enable Bit which must be set high before Data
EEPROM write operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data
EEPROM write operations.
Bit 2
WR: EEPROM Write Control
0: Write cycle has finished
1: Activate a write cycle
This is the Data EEPROM Write Control Bit and when set high by the application
program will activate a write cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the
hardware after the write cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if
the WREN has not first been set high.
Bit 1
RDEN: Data EEPROM Read Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Data EEPROM Read Enable Bit which must be set high before Data
EEPROM read operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data
EEPROM read operations.
Bit 0
RD: EEPROM Read Control
0: Read cycle has finished
1: Activate a read cycle
This is the Data EEPROM Read Control Bit and when set high by the application
program will activate a read cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the
hardware after the read cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if
the RDEN has not first been set high.
Note: The WREN, WR, RDEN and RD can not be set to “1” at the same time in one
instruction. The WR and RD can not be set to “1” at the same time.
42
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reading Data from the EEPROM
To read data from the EEPROM, the read enable bit, RDEN, in the EEC register must first be set
high to enable the read function. The EEPROM address of the data to be read must then be placed
in the EEA register. If the RD bit in the EEC register is now set high, a read cycle will be initiated.
Setting the RD bit high will not initiate a read operation if the RDEN bit has not been set. When
the read cycle terminates, the RD bit will be automatically cleared to zero, after which the data can
be read from the EED register. The data will remain in the EED register until another read or write
operation is executed. The application program can poll the RD bit to determine when the data is
valid for reading.
Writing Data to the EEPROM
To write data to the EEPROM, the EEPROM address of the data to be written must first be placed
in the EEA register and the data placed in the EED register. Then the write enable bit, WREN,
in the EEC register must first be set high to enable the write function. After this, the WR bit in
the EEC register must be immediately set high to initiate a write cycle. These two instructions
must be executed consecutively. The global interrupt bit EMI should also first be cleared before
implementing any write operations, and then set again after the write cycle has started. Note that
setting the WR bit high will not initiate a write cycle if the WREN bit has not been set. As the
EEPROM write cycle is controlled using an internal timer whose operation is asynchronous to
microcontroller system clock, a certain time will elapse before the data will have been written into
the EEPROM. Detecting when the write cycle has finished can be implemented either by polling the
WR bit in the EEC register or by using the EEPROM interrupt. When the write cycle terminates,
the WR bit will be automatically cleared to zero by the microcontroller, informing the user that the
data has been written to the EEPROM. The application program can therefore poll the WR bit to
determine when the write cycle has ended.
Write Protection
Protection against inadvertent write operation is provided in several ways. After the device is
powered-on the Write Enable bit in the control register will be cleared preventing any write
operations. Also at power-on the Bank Pointer, BP, will be reset to zero, which means that Data
Memory Bank 0 will be selected. As the EEPROM control register is located in Bank 1, this adds a
further measure of protection against spurious write operations. During normal program operation,
ensuring that the Write Enable bit in the control register is cleared will safeguard against incorrect
write operations.
EEPROM Interrupt
The EEPROM write interrupt is generated when an EEPROM write cycle has ended. The EEPROM
interrupt must first be enabled by setting the DEE bit in the relevant interrupt register. However as
the EEPROM is contained within a Multi-function Interrupt, the associated multi-function interrupt
enable bit must also be set. When an EEPROM write cycle ends, the DEF request flag and its
associated multi-function interrupt request flag will both be set. If the global, EEPROM and Multifunction interrupts are enabled and the stack is not full, a jump to the associated Multi-function
Interrupt vector will take place. When the interrupt is serviced only the Multi-function interrupt flag
will be automatically reset, the EEPROM interrupt flag must be manually reset by the application
program. More details can be obtained in the Interrupt section.
Rev. 1.40
43
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
Care must be taken that data is not inadvertently written to the EEPROM. Protection can be
enhanced by ensuring that the Write Enable bit is normally cleared to zero when not writing. Also
the Bank Pointer could be normally cleared to zero as this would inhibit access to Bank 1 where
the EEPROM control register exist. Although certainly not necessary, consideration might be given
in the application program to the checking of the validity of new write data by a simple read back
process.
When writing data the WR bit must be set high immediately after the WREN bit has been set high,
to ensure the write cycle executes correctly. The global interrupt bit EMI should also be cleared
before a write cycle is executed and then re-enabled after the write cycle starts. Note that the device
should not enter the IDLE or SLEEP mode until the EEPROM read or write operation is totally
complete. Otherwise, the EEPROM read or write operation will fail.
• Programming Examples
Rev. 1.40
♦♦
Reading data from the EEPROM - polling method
MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES ; user defined address
MOV EEA, A
MOV A, 040H ; setup memory pointer MP1
MOV MP1, A ; MP1 points to EEC register
MOV A, 01H ; setup Bank Pointer
MOV BP, A
SET IAR1.1 ; set RDEN bit, enable read operations
SET IAR1.0 ; start Read Cycle - set RD bit
BACK:
SZIAR1.0 ; check for read cycle end
JMP BACK
CLR IAR1 ; disable EEPROM read/write
CLR BP
MOV A, EED; move read data to register
MOV READ_DATA, A
♦♦
Writing Data to the EEPROM – polling method
MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES ; user defined address
MOV EEA, A
MOV A, EEPROM_DATA ; user defined data
MOV EED, A
MOV A, 040H ; setup memory pointer MP1
MOV MP1, A ; MP1 points to EEC register
MOV A, 01H ; setup Bank Pointer
MOV BP, A
CLR EMI
SET IAR1.3 ; set WREN bit, enable write operations
SET IAR1.2 ; start Write Cycle - set WR bit
SET EMI
BACK:
SZIAR1.2 ; check for write cycle end
JMP BACK
CLR IAR1 ; disable EEPROM read/write
CLR BP
44
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Oscillators
Various oscillator options offer the user a wide range of functions according to their various
application requirements. The flexible features of the oscillator functions ensure that the best
optimisation can be achieved in terms of speed and power saving. Oscillator selections and operation
are selected through a combination of configuration options and registers.
Oscillator Overview
In addition to being the source of the main system clock the oscillators also provide clock sources
for the Watchdog Timer and Time Base Interrupts. External oscillators requiring some external
components as well as fully integrated internal oscillators, requiring no external components,
are provided to form a wide range of both fast and slow system oscillators. All oscillator options
are selected through the configuration options. The higher frequency oscillators provide higher
performance but carry with it the disadvantage of higher power requirements, while the opposite
is of course true for the lower frequency oscillators. With the capability of dynamically switching
between fast and slow system clock, the device has the flexibility to optimize the performance/
power ratio, a feature especially important in power sensitive portable applications.
Type
Name
Freq.
Pins
External Crystal
HXT
400kHz~12MHz
OSC1/OSC2
External RC
ERC
4MHz~12MHz
OSC1
Internal High Speed RC
HIRC
8MHz
—
LXT
32.768kHz
XT1/XT2
LIRC
32kHz
—
External Low Speed Crystal
Internal Low Speed RC
Oscillator Types
System Clock Configurations
There are five methods of generating the system clock, three high speed oscillators and two low
speed oscillators. The high speed oscillators are the external crystal/ceramic oscillator, external RC
oscillator and the internal 8MHz RC oscillator. The two low speed oscillators are the internal 32kHz
RC oscillator and the external 32.768kHz crystal oscillator. Selecting whether the low or high speed
oscillator is used as the system oscillator is implemented using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0
bits in the SMOD0 register and as the system clock can be dynamically selected.
The actual source clock used for each of the high speed and low speed oscillators is chosen
via configuration options. The frequency of the slow speed or high speed system clock is also
determined using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD0 register. Note that two
oscillator selections must be made namely one high speed and one low speed system oscillators. It is
not possible to choose a no-oscillator selection for either the high or low speed oscillator.
Rev. 1.40
45
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
High ��eed
Oscillato�
HXT
ERC
fH
6-stage P�escale�
HIRC
fH/�
fH/4
Low ��eed
Oscillato�
High ��eed Oscillato�
Configu�ation O�tion
fH/8
fH/16
fH/3�
fH/64
LIRC
f�Y�
fL
LXT
HLCLK�
CK��~CK�0 �its
Low ��eed Oscillato�
Configu�ation O�tion
f�UB
Fast Wake-u� f�o� �LEEP Mode o�
IDLE Mode Cont�ol (fo� HXT only)
System Clock Configurations
External Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator – HXT
The External Crystal/Ceramic System Oscillator is one of the high frequency oscillator choices,
which is selected via configuration option. For most crystal oscillator configurations, the simple
connection of a crystal across OSC1 and OSC2 will create the necessary phase shift and feedback for
oscillation, without requiring external capacitors. However, for some crystal types and frequencies,
to ensure oscillation, it may be necessary to add two small value capacitors, C1 and C2. Using a
ceramic resonator will usually require two small value capacitors, C1 and C2, to be connected as
shown for oscillation to occur. The values of C1 and C2 should be selected in consultation with the
crystal or resonator manufacturer’s specification.
For oscillator stability and to minimise the effects of noise and crosstalk, it is important to ensure
thatthe crystal and any associated resistors andcapacitors along with interconnectinglines are all
located as close to the MCUas possible.
     Crystal/Resonator Oscillator – HXT
Rev. 1.40
46
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Crystal Oscillator C1 and C2 Values
Crystal Frequency
C1
C2
12MHz
0pF
0pF
8MHz
0pF
0pF
4MHz
0pF
0pF
1MHz
100pF
100pF
Note: C1 and C2 values are for guidance only.
Crystal Recommended Capacitor Values
External RC Oscillator – ERC
Using the ERC oscillator only requires that a resistor, with a value between 56kΩ and 2.4MΩ,
is connected between OSC1 and VDD, and a capacitor is connected between OSC1 and ground,
providing a low cost oscillator configuration. It is only the external resistor that determines the
oscillation frequency; the external capacitor has no influence over the frequency and is connected
for stability purposes only. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and the inclusion
of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence of the power
supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are minimised. As a
resistance/frequency reference point, it can be noted that with an external 120kΩ resistor connected
and with a 5V voltage power supply and temperature of 25°C degrees, the oscillator will have a
frequency of 4MHz within a tolerance of 2%. Here only the OSC1 pin is used, which is shared with
I/O pin PA5, leaving pin PA6 free for use as a normal I/O pin.
For oscillator stability and to minimise the effects of noise and crosstalk, it is important to locate the
capacitor and resistoras close to the MCU as possible.
VDD
RO�C
O�C1
I/O
�0�F
O�C�
External RC Oscillator – ERC
Internal RC Oscillator – HIRC
The internal RC oscillator is a fully integrated system oscillator requiring no external components.
The internal RC oscillator has a fixed frequencies of 8MHz. Device trimming during the
manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to
ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the
oscillation frequency are minimised. As a result, at a power supply of either 3V or 5V and at a
temperature of 25°C degrees, the fixed oscillation frequency of 8MHz will have a tolerance within
2%. Note that if this internal system clock option is selected, as it requires no external pins for its
operation, I/O pins are free for use as normal I/O pins.
Rev. 1.40
47
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
External 32.768kHz Crystal Oscillator – LXT
The External 32.768kHz Crystal System Oscillator is one of the low frequency oscillator choices,
which is selected via configuration option. This clock source has a fixed frequency of 32.768kHz
and requires a 32.768kHz crystal to be connected between pins XT1 and XT2. The external resistor
and capacitor components connected to the 32.768kHz crystal are necessary to provide oscillation.
For applications where precise frequencies are essential, these components may be required to
provide frequency compensation due to different crystal manufacturing tolerances. During power-up
there is a time delay associated with the LXT oscillator waiting for it to start-up.
When the microcontroller enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the system clock is switched off to stop
microcontroller activity and to conserve power. However, in many microcontroller applications
it may be necessary to keep the internal timers operational even when the microcontroller is in
the SLEEP or IDLE Mode. To do this, another clock, independent of the system clock, must be
provided.
However, for some crystals, to ensure oscillation and accurate frequency generation, it is necessary
to add two small value external capacitors, C1 and C2. The exact values of C1 and C2 should
be selected in consultation with the crystal or resonator manufacturer specification. The external
parallel feedback resistor, RP, is required.
Some configuration options determine if the XT1/XT2 pins are used for the LXT oscillator or as I/O
pins.
• If the LXT oscillator is not used for any clock source, the XT1/XT2 pins can be used as normal I/O
pins.
• If the LXT oscillator is used for any clock source, the 32.768kHz crystal should be connected to
the XT1/XT2 pins.
For oscillator stability and to minimise the effects of noise and crosstalk, it is important to ensure
thatthe crystal and any associated resistors andcapacitors along with interconnectinglines are all
located as close to the MCUas possible.
‚   
­ €
  ‚  External LXT Oscillator
LXT Oscillator C1 and C2 Values
Crystal Frequency
C1
C2
32.768kHz
10pF
10pF
Note: 1. C1 and C2 values are for guidance only.
2. RP=5M~10MΩ is recommended.
32.768kHz Crystal Recommended Capacitor Values
Rev. 1.40
48
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LXT Oscillator Low Power Function
The LXT oscillator can function in one of two modes, the Quick Start Mode and the Low Power
Mode. The mode selection is executed using the LXTLP bit in the TBC register.
LXTLP Bit
LXT Mode
0
Quick Start
1
Low-power
After power on, the LXTLP bit will be automatically cleared to zero ensuring that the LXT oscillator
is in the Quick Start operating mode. In the Quick Start Mode the LXT oscillator will power up
and stabilise quickly. However, after the LXT oscillator has fully powered up it can be placed
into the Low-power mode by setting the LXTLP bit high. The oscillator will continue to run but
with reduced current consumption, as the higher current consumption is only required during the
LXT oscillator start-up. In power sensitive applications, such as battery applications, where power
consumption must be kept to a minimum, it is therefore recommended that the application program
sets the LXTLP bit high about 2 seconds after power-on.
It should be noted that, no matter what condition the LXTLP bit is set to, the LXT oscillator will
always function normally, the only difference is that it will take more time to start up if in the Lowpower mode.
Internal 32kHz Oscillator – LIRC
The Internal 32kHz System Oscillator is one of the low frequency oscillator choices, which is
selected via configuration option. It is a fully integrated RC oscillator with a typical frequency of
32kHz at 5V, requiring no external components for its implementation. Device trimming during
the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used
to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the
oscillation frequency are minimised. As a result, at a power supply of 5V and at a temperature of
25°C degrees, the fixed oscillation frequency of 32kHz will have a tolerance within 10%.
Supplementary Oscillators
The low speed oscillators, in addition to providing a system clock source are also used to provide a
clock source to three other device functions. These are the Watchdog Timer, the LCD driver and the
Time Base Interrupts.
Rev. 1.40
49
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Operating Modes and System Clocks
Present day applications require that their microcontrollers have high performance but often still
demand that they consume as little power as possible, conflicting requirements that are especially
true in battery powered portable applications. The fast clocks required for high performance will
by their nature increase current consumption and of course vice-versa, lower speed clocks reduce
current consumption. As Holtek has provided the device with both high and low speed clock sources
and the means to switch between them dynamically, the user can optimise the operation of their
microcontroller to achieve the best performance/power ratio.
System Clocks
The device has many different clock sources for both the CPU and peripheral function operation.
By providing the user with a wide range of clock options using configuration options and register
programming, a clock system can be configured to obtain maximum application performance.
The main system clock, can come from either a high frequency fH or low frequency fL source, and is
selected using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD0 register. The high speed system
clock can be sourced from either an HXT, ERC or HIRC oscillator, selected via a configuration
option. The low speed system clock source can be sourced from internal clock fL. If fL is selected
then it can be sourced by either the LXT or LIRC oscillator, selected via a configuration option.
The other choice, which is a divided version of the high speed system oscillator has a range of
fH/2~fH/64.
There are two additional internal clocks for the peripheral circuits, the substitute clock, fSUB, and
the Time Base clock, fTBC. Each of these internal clocks is sourced by either the LXT or LIRC
oscillators, selected via configuration options. The fSUB clock is used to provide a substitute clock for
the microcontroller just after a wake-up has occurred to enable faster wake-up times.
Rev. 1.40
50
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
  ‚ ƒ     
€
 ­ 
  
… †
‡ ˆ ‰   „ Š ‹ ‚ ƒ Œ Œ Ž ‘ ’
… 
… „ 
„ „ €
 ‹  …  “
” ƒ ˆ  ƒ ­
Note: When the system clock source fSYS is switched to fL from fH, the high speed oscillation will stop to conserve
the power. Thus there is no fH~fH/64 for peripheral circuit to use.
Together with fSYS/4 it is also used as one of the clock sources for the Watchdog timer. The fTBC clock is
used as a source for the Time Base interrupt functions and for the TMs. The fSUB is used as the LCD source.
Rev. 1.40
51
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
System Operation Modes
There are six different modes of operation for the microcontroller, each one with its own
special characteristics and which can be chosen according to the specific performance and
power requirements of the application. There are two modes allowing normal operation of the
microcontroller, the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode. The remaining four modes, the SLEEP0,
SLEEP1, IDLE0 and IDLE1 Mode are used when the microcontroller CPU is switched off to
conserve power.
Operating Mode
Description
CPU
fSYS
fSUB
fS
fTBC
NORMAL Mode
on
fH~fH/64
on
on
on
SLOW Mode
on
fL
on
on
on
IDLE0 Mode
off
off
on
on/off
on
IDLE1 Mode
off
on
on
on
on
SLEEP0 Mode
off
off
off
off
off
SLEEP1 Mode
off
off
on
on
off
NORMAL Mode
As the name suggests this is one of the main operating modes where the microcontroller has all of
its functions operational and where the system clock is provided by one of the high speed oscillators.
This mode operates allowing the microcontroller to operate normally with a clock source will come
from one of the high speed oscillators, either the HXT, ERC or HIRC oscillators. The high speed
oscillator will however first be divided by a ratio ranging from 1 to 64, the actual ratio being selected
by the CKS2~CKS0 and HLCLK bits in the SMOD0 register. Although a high speed oscillator is
used, running the microcontroller at a divided clock ratio reduces the operating current.
SLOW Mode
This is also a mode where the microcontroller operates normally although now with a slower speed
clock source. The clock source used will be from one of the low speed oscillators, either the LXT
or the LIRC. Running the microcontroller in this mode allows it to run with much lower operating
currents. In the SLOW Mode, the fH is off.
SLEEP0 Mode
The SLEEP Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD0 register is low. In the SLEEP0 mode the CPU will be stopped, and the fSUB and fS clocks
will be stopped too, and the Watchdog Timer function is disabled. In this mode, the LVDEN is must
set to “0”. If the LVDEN is set to “1”, it won’t enter the SLEEP0 Mode.
SLEEP1 Mode
The SLEEP Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD0 register is low. In the SLEEP1 mode the CPU will be stopped. However the fSUB and fS
clocks will continue to operate if the LVDEN is “1” or the Watchdog Timer function is enabled and
if its clock source is chosen via configuration option to come from the fSUB.
Rev. 1.40
52
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
IDLE0 Mode
The IDLE0 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD0 register is high and the FSYSON bit in the SMOD1 register is low. In the IDLE0 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU but some peripheral functions will remain
operational such as the Watchdog Timer, TMs, LCD driver and SPI. In the IDLE0 Mode, the system
oscillator will be stopped. In the IDLE0 Mode the Watchdog Timer clock, fS, will either be on or
off depending upon the fS clock source. If the source is fSYS/4 then the fS clock will be off, and if the
source comes from fSUB then fS will be on.
IDLE1 Mode
The IDLE1 Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD0 register is high and the FSYSON bit in the SMOD1 register is high. In the IDLE1 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU but may continue to provide a clock source
to keep some peripheral functions operational such as the Watchdog Timer, TMs, LCD driver and
SPI. In the IDLE1 Mode, the system oscillator will continue to run, and this system oscillator may
be high speed or low speed system oscillator. In the IDLE1 Mode the Watchdog Timer clock, fS, will
be on. If the source is fSYS/4 then the fS clock will be on, and if the source comes from fSUB then fS
will be on.
Control Register
A single register, SMOD0, is used for overall control of the internal clocks within the device.
SMOD0 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
FSTEN
LTO
HTO
IDLEN
HLCLK
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 7~5
CKS2~CKS0: The system clock selection when HLCLK is “0”
000: fL (fLXT or fLIRC)
001: fL (fLXT or fLIRC)
010: fH/64
011: fH/32
100: fH/16
101: fH/8
110: fH/4
111: fH/2
These three bits are used to select which clock is used as the system clock source. In
addition to the system clock source, which can be either the LXT or LIRC, a divided
version of the high speed system oscillator can also be chosen as the system clock
source.
Bit 4
FSTEN: Fast Wake-up Control (only for HXT)
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Fast Wake-up Control bit which determines if the fSUB clock source is
initially used after the device wakes up. When the bit is high, the fSUB clock source can
be used as a temporary system clock to provide a faster wake up time as the fSUB clock
is available.
53
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Rev. 1.40
Bit 3
LTO: Low speed system oscillator ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the low speed system oscillator ready flag which indicates when the low speed
system oscillator is stable after power on reset or a wake-up has occurred. The flag
will be low when in the SLEEP0 Mode but after a wake-up has occurred, the flag will
change to a high level after 1024 clock cycles if the LXT oscillator is used and 1~2
clock cycles if the LIRC oscillator is used.
Bit 2
HTO: High speed system oscillator ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the high speed system oscillator ready flag which indicates when the high speed
system oscillator is stable. This flag is cleared to “0” by hardware when the device is
powered on and then changes to a high level after the high speed system oscillator is
stable.
Therefore this flag will always be read as “1” by the application program after device
power-on. The flag will be low when in the SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode but after a wakeup has occurred, the flag will change to a high level after 1024 clock cycles if the HXT
oscillator is used and after 15~16 clock cycles if the ERC or HIRC oscillator is used.
Bit 1
IDLEN: IDLE Mode control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the IDLE Mode Control bit and determines what happens when the HALT
instruction is executed. If this bit is high, when a HALT instruction is executed the
device will enter the IDLE Mode. In the IDLE1 Mode the CPU will stop running
but the system clock will continue to keep the peripheral functions operational, if
FSYSON bit is high. If FSYSON bit is low, the CPU and the system clock will all stop
in IDLE0 mode. If the bit is low the device will enter the SLEEP Mode when a HALT
instruction is executed.
Bit 0
HLCLK: system clock selection
0: fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL
1: fH
This bit is used to select if the fH clock or the fH/2~fH/64 or fL clock is used as the
system clock. When the bit is high the f H clock will be selected and if low the
fH/2~fH/64 or fL clock will be selected. When system clock switches from the fH clock
to the fL clock and the fH clock will be automatically switched off to conserve power.
54
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Fast Wake – up
To minimise power consumption the device can enter the SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode, where the system
clock source to the device will be stopped. However when the device is woken up again, it can take
a considerable time for the original system oscillator to restart, stabilise and allow normal operation
to resume. To ensure the device is up and running as fast as possible a Fast Wake-up function is
provided, which allows fSUB, namely either the LXT or LIRC oscillator, to act as a temporary clock
to first drive the system until the original system oscillator has stabilised. As the clock source for
the Fast Wake-up function is fSUB, the Fast Wake-up function is only available in the SLEEP1 and
IDLE0 modes. When the device is woken up from the SLEEP0 mode, the Fast Wake-up function has
no effect because the fSUB clock is stopped. The Fast Wake-up enable/disable function is controlled
using the FSTEN bit in the SMOD0 register.
If the HXT oscillator is selected as the NORMAL Mode system clock, and if the Fast Wake-up
function is enabled, then it will take one to two tSUB clock cycles of the LIRC or LXT oscillator
for the system to wake-up. The system will then initially run under the fSUB clock source until 1024
HXT clock cycles have elapsed, at which point the HTO flag will switch high and the system will
switch over to operating from the HXT oscillator.
If the ERC or HIRC oscillators or LIRC oscillator is used as the system oscillator then it will take
15~16 clock cycles of the ERC or HIRC or 1~2 cycles of the LIRC to wake up the system from the
SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode. The Fast Wake-up bit, FSTEN will have no effect in these cases.
System
Oscillator
HXT
FSTEN Bit
0
1024 HXT cycles
1024 HXT cycles
1024 HXT cycles
1~2 fSUB cycles
(System runs with fSUB first for 1024
1~2 HXT cycles
HXT cycles and then switches over
to run with the HXT clock)
1
Wake-up Time
(SLEEP1 Mode)
Wake-up
Time
(IDLE0
Mode)
Wake-up Time
(SLEEP0 Mode)
Wake-up Time
(IDLE1 Mode)
1~2 HXT cycles
ERC
×
15~16 ERC cycles 15~16 ERC cycles
1~2 ERC cycles
HIRC
×
15~16 HIRC cycles 15~16 HIRC cycles
1~2 HIRC cycles
LIRC
×
1~2 LIRC cycles
1~2 LIRC cycles
1~2 LIRC cycles
LXT
×
1024 LTX cycles
1024 LTX cycles
1~2 LXT cycles
Wake-Up Times
Note that if the Watchdog Timer is disabled, which means that the LXT and LIRC are all both off,
then there will be no Fast Wake-up function available when the device wake-up from the SLEEP0
Mode.
Rev. 1.40
55
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
­ €    
­ €    Operating Mode Switching
The device can switch between operating modes dynamically allowing the user to select the best
performance/power ratio for the present task in hand. In this way microcontroller operations that
do not require high performance can be executed using slower clocks thus requiring less operating
current and prolonging battery life in portable applications.
In simple terms, Mode Switching between the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode is executed
using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD0 register while Mode Switching from the
NORMAL/SLOW Modes to the SLEEP/IDLE Modes is executed via the HALT instruction. When
a HALT instruction is executed, whether the device enters the IDLE Mode or the SLEEP Mode is
determined by the condition of the IDLEN bit in the SMOD0 register and FSYSON in the SMOD1
register.
When the HLCLK bit switches to a low level, which implies that clock source is switched from the
high speed clock source, fH, to the clock source, fH/2~fH/64 or fL. If the clock is from the fL, the high
speed clock source will stop running to conserve power. When this happens it must be noted that the
fH/16 and fH/64 internal clock sources will also stop running, which may affect the operation of other
internal functions such as the TMs and the SPI. The accompanying flowchart shows what happens
when the device moves between the various operating modes.
Rev. 1.40
56
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching
When running in the NORMAL Mode, which uses the high speed system oscillator, and therefore
consumes more power, the system clock can switch to run in the SLOW Mode by set the HLCLK bit
to “0” and set the CKS2~CKS0 bits to “000” or “001” in the SMOD0 register. This will then use the
low speed system oscillator which will consume less power. Users may decide to do this for certain
operations which do not require high performance and can subsequently reduce power consumption.
The SLOW Mode is sourced from the LXT or the LIRC oscillators and therefore requires these
oscillators to be stable before full mode switching occurs. This is monitored using the LTO bit in the
SMOD0 register.
  
   ­   ­       ­   ­  €‚ ƒ    ­   ­  €‚ ƒ    ­   ­  Rev. 1.40
57
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching
In SLOW Mode the system uses either the LXT or LIRC low speed system oscillator. To switch
back to the NORMAL Mode, where the high speed system oscillator is used, the HLCLK bit should
be set to “1” or HLCLK bit is “0”, but CKS2~CKS0 is set to “010”, “011”, “100”, “101”, “110”
or “111”. As a certain amount of time will be required for the high frequency clock to stabilise,
the status of the HTO bit is checked. The amount of time required for high speed system oscillator
stabilization depends upon which high speed system oscillator type is used.
  
     ­          ­   € ‚      ­   € ‚      ­   Entering the SLEEP0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP0 Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD0 register equal to “0” and the
WDT and LVD both off. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the
following will occur:
• The system clock, WDT clock and Time Base clock will be stopped and the application program
will stop at the “HALT” instruction.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and stopped no matter if the WDT clock source originates from the fSUB
clock or from the system clock.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Rev. 1.40
58
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Entering the SLEEP1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP1 Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD0 register equal to “0” and
the WDT or LVD on. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the
following will occur:
• The system clock and Time Base clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at
the “HALT” instruction, but the WDT or LVD will remain with the clock source coming from the
fSUB clock.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT clock source is selected to come from
the fSUB clock as the WDT is enabled.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE0 Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD0 register equal to “1” and the
FSYSON bit in SMOD1 register equal to “0”. When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
• The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the “HALT”
instruction, but the Time Base clock and fSUB clock will be on.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT clock source is selected to come from
the fSUB clock and the WDT is enabled. The WDT will stop if its clock source originates from the
system clock.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE1 Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD0 register equal to “1” and the
FSYSON bit in SMOD1 register equal to “1”. When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
• The system clock and Time Base clock and fSUB clock will be on and the application program will
stop at the “HALT” instruction.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT is enabled regardless of the WDT
clock source which originates from the fSUB clock or from the system clock.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Rev. 1.40
59
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standby Current Considerations
As the main reason for entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode is to keep the current consumption of the
device to as low a value as possible, perhaps only in the order of several micro-amps except in the
IDLE1 Mode, there are other considerations which must also be taken into account by the circuit
designer if the power consumption is to be minimised. Special attention must be made to the I/O pins
on the device. All high-impedance input pins must be connected to either a fixed high or low level as
any floating input pins could create internal oscillations and result in increased current consumption.
This also applies to the device which has different package types, as there may be unbonbed pins.
These must either be setup as outputs or if setup as inputs must have pull-high resistors connected.
Care must also be taken with the loads, which are connected to I/O pins, which are setup as outputs.
These should be placed in a condition in which minimum current is drawn or connected only to
external circuits that do not draw current, such as other CMOS inputs. Also note that additional
standby current will also be required if the configuration options have enabled the LXT or LIRC
oscillator.
In the IDLE1 Mode the system oscillator is on, if the system oscillator is from the high speed system
oscillator, the additional standby current will also be perhaps in the order of several hundred microamps.
Wake-up
After the system enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, it can be woken up from one of various sources
listed as follows:
• An external falling edge on Port A
• A system interrupt
• A WDT overflow
If the device is woken up by a WDT overflow, a Watchdog Timer reset will be initiated. The PDF
flag is cleared by a system power-up or executing the clear Watchdog Timer instructions and is set
when executing the “HALT” instruction. The TO flag is set if a WDT time-out occurs, and causes
a wake-up that only resets the Program Counter and Stack Pointer, the other flags remain in their
original status.
Each pin on Port A can be setup using the PAWK register to permit a negative transition on the pin
to wake-up the system. When a Port A pin wake-up occurs, the program will resume execution at
the instruction following the “HALT” instruction. If the system is woken up by an interrupt, then
two possible situations may occur. The first is where the related interrupt is disabled or the interrupt
is enabled but the stack is full, in which case the program will resume execution at the instruction
following the “HALT” instruction. In this situation, the interrupt which woke-up the device will not
be immediately serviced, but will rather be serviced later when the related interrupt is finally enabled
or when a stack level becomes free. The other situation is where the related interrupt is enabled and
the stack is not full, in which case the regular interrupt response takes place. If an interrupt request
flag is set high before entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake-up function of the related
interrupt will be disabled.
Rev. 1.40
60
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
The HXT and LXT oscillators both use the same SST counter. For example, if the system is woken
up from the SLEEP0 Mode and both the HXT and LXT oscillators need to start-up from an off state.
The LXT oscillator uses the SST counter after HXT oscillator has finished its SST period.
• If the device is woken up from the SLEEP0 Mode to the NORMAL Mode, the high speed system
oscillator needs an SST period. The device will execute first instruction after HTO is “1”. At this
time, the LXT oscillator may not be stability if fSUB is from LXT oscillator. The same situation
occurs in the power-on state. The LXT oscillator is not ready yet when the first instruction is
executed.
• If the device is woken up from the SLEEP1 Mode to NORMAL Mode, and the system clock
source is from HXT oscillator and FSTEN is “1”, the system clock can be switched to the LXT
or LIRC oscillator after wake up.
• There are peripheral functions, such as WDT, TMs, SPI1 and LCD driver, for which the fSYS
is used. If the system clock source is switched from fH to fL, the clock source to the peripheral
functions mentioned above will change accordingly.
• The on/off condition of fSUB and fS depends upon whether the WDT is enabled or disabled as the
WDT clock source is selected from fSUB.
Rev. 1.40
61
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Watchdog Timer
The Watchdog Timer is provided to prevent program malfunctions or sequences from jumping to
unknown locations, due to certain uncontrollable external events such as electrical noise.
Watchdog Timer Clock Source
The Watchdog Timer clock source is provided by the internal clock, fS, which is in turn supplied by
one of two sources selected by configuration option: fSUB or fSYS/4. The fSUB clock can be sourced
from either the LXT or LIRC oscillators, again chosen via a configuration option. The LIRC internal
oscillator has an approximate period of 32kHz at a supply voltage of 5V.
However, it should be noted that this specified internal clock period can vary with VDD, temperature
and process variations. The LXT oscillator is supplied by an external 32.768kHz crystal. The other
Watchdog Timer clock source option is the fSYS/4 clock. The Watchdog Timer clock source can
originate from its own internal LIRC oscillator, the LXT oscillator or fSYS/4. It is divided by a value
of 28 to 218, using the WS2~WS0 bits in the WDTC register to obtain the required Watchdog Timer
time-out period.
Watchdog Timer Control Register
A single register, WDTC, controls the required timeout period as well as the enable reset operation.
This register together with several configuration options control the overall operation of the
Watchdog Timer.
WDTC Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
WE4
WE3
WE2
WE1
WE0
WS2
WS1
WS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 7~3
WE4~WE0: WDT enable
10101 or 01010: enable
Other values: MCU reset (reset will be active after 2~3 LIRC clock for debounce time)
If the MCU reset caused WE4~WE0 in WDTC software reset, the WRF flag of
SMOD1 register will be set.
Bit 2~0
WS2~WS0: select WDT timeout period
000: 28/fS
10
001: 2 /fS
12
010:
2
/fS
14
011: 2 /fS (default)
100: 215/fS
16
101: 2 /fS
17
110: 2 /fS
111: 218/fS
62
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Watchdog Timer Operation
The Watchdog Timer operates by providing a device reset when its timer overflows. This means
that in the application program and during normal operation the user has to strategically clear the
Watchdog Timer before it overflows to prevent the Watchdog Timer from executing a reset. This is
done using the clear watchdog instructions.
Under normal program operation, a Watchdog Timer time-out will initialise a device reset and set
the status bit TO. However, if the system is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, when a Watchdog Timer
time-out occurs, the TO bit in the status register will be set and only the Program Counter and Stack
Pointer will be reset. Three methods can be adopted to clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer.
The first is a WDT reset, which means a certain value except 01010B and 10101B written into the
WE4~WE0 bit filed, the second is using the Watchdog Timer software clear instructions and the
third is via a HALT instruction.
There are two methods of using software instructions to clear the Watchdog Timer, one of which
must be chosen by configuration option. The first option is to use the single “CLR WDT” instruction
while the second is to use the two commands “CLR WDT1” and “CLR WDT2”. For the first option,
a simple execution of CLR WDT will clear the WDT while for the second option, both “CLR
WDT1” and “CLR WDT2” must both be executed alternately to successfully clear the Watchdog
Timer. Note that for this second option, if “CLR WDT1” is used to clear the Watchdog Timer,
successive executions of this instruction will have no effect, only the execution of a “CLR WDT2”
instruction will clear the Watchdog Timer. Similarly after the “CLR WDT2” instruction has been
executed, only a successive “CLR WDT1” instruction can clear the Watchdog Timer.
The maximum time out period is when the 218 division ratio is selected. As an example, with a
32.768kHz LXT oscillator as its source clock, this will give a maximum watchdog period of around
8 second for the 218 division ratio, and a minimum timeout of 7.8ms for the 28 division ration. If the
fSYS/4 clock is used as the Watchdog Timer clock source, it should be noted that when the system
enters the SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode, then the instruction clock is stopped and the Watchdog Timer
may lose its protecting purposes. For systems that operate in noisy environments, using the fSUB
clock source is strongly recommended.
WDTC Registe�
Configu�ation
o�tion
WE4~WE0 �its
Reset MCU
“CLR WDT1 and CLR WDT�”
o� “CLR WDT” Inst�uction
CLR
“HALT” Inst�uction
LXT
LIRC
M
U
X
f�Y�/4
f�UB
Configu�ation
o�tion
M
U
X
f�
Configu�ation
o�tion
8-stage Divide�
W��~W�0
f�/�8
WDT P�escale�
WDT Ti�e-out
8-to-1 MUX
Watchdog Timer
Rev. 1.40
63
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SMOD1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
x
0
0
“x” unknown
Rev. 1.40
Bit 7
FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 6~3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2
LVRF: reset caused by LVR function activation
0: not active
1: active
This bit can be clear to “0”, but can not set to “1”.
Bit 1
LRF: reset caused by LVRC setting
0: not active
1: active
This bit can be clear to “0”, but can not set to “1”.
Bit 0
WRF: reset caused by WE[4:0] setting
0: not active
1: active
This bit can be clear to “0”, but can not set to “1”.
64
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reset and Initialisation
A reset function is a fundamental part of any microcontroller ensuring that the device can be set
to some predetermined condition irrespective of outside parameters. The most important reset
condition is after power is first applied to the microcontroller. In this case, internal circuitry will
ensure that the microcontroller, after a short delay, will be in a well defined state and ready to
execute the first program instruction. After this power-on reset, certain important internal registers
will be set to defined states before the program commences. One of these registers is the Program
Counter, which will be reset to zero forcing the microcontroller to begin program execution from the
lowest Program Memory address.
Another type of reset is when the Watchdog Timer overflows and resets. All types of reset operations
result in different register conditions being setup. Another reset exists in the form of a Low Voltage
Reset, LVR, where a full reset, is implemented in situations where the power supply voltage falls
below a certain threshold.
Reset Functions
There are several ways in which a reset can occur, each of which will be described as follows.
Power-on Reset
The most fundamental and unavoidable reset is the one that occurs after power is first applied to
the microcontroller. As well as ensuring that the Program Memory begins execution from the first
memory address, a power-on reset also ensures that certain other registers are preset to known
conditions. All the I/O port and port control registers will power up in a high condition ensuring that
all I/O ports will be first set to inputs.
VDD
Powe�-on Reset
tR�TD
��T Ti�e-out
Power-On Reset Timing Chart
Low Voltage Reset – LVR
The microcontroller contains a low voltage reset circuit in order to monitor the supply voltage of
the device. The LVR function is always enabled with a specific LVR voltage, VLVR. If the supply
voltage of the device drops to within a range of 0.9V~VLVR such as might occur when changing
the battery, the LVR will automatically reset the device internally. The LVR includes the following
specifications: For a valid LVR signal, a low voltage, i.e., a voltage in the range between 0.9V~VLVR
must exist for greater than the value tLVR specified in the LVR Electrical Characteristics. If the low
voltage state does not exceed tLVR, the LVR will ignore it and will not perform a reset function. The
actual VLVR value can be selected by the LVS7~LVS0 bits in the LVRC register. If the LVS7~LVS0
bits are changed to some certain values by the environmental noise or software setting, the LVR will
reset the device after 2~3 LIRC clock cycles. When this happens, the LRF bit in the SMOD1 register
will be set to 1. After power on the register will have the value of 01010101B. Note that the LVR
function will be automatically disabled when the device enters the power down mode.
Low Voltage Reset Timing Chart
Rev. 1.40
65
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
• LVRC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
LVS7
LVS6
LVS5
LVS4
LVS3
LVS2
LVS1
LVS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 7~0
LVS7~LVS0: LVR voltage select
01010101: 2.1V (default)
00110011: 2.55V
10011001: 3.15V
10101010: 3.8V
Other values: MCU reset (reset will be active after 2~3 LIRC clock for debounce time).
When an actual low voltage condition occurs, as specified by one of the four defined
LVR voltage values above, an MCU reset will be generated. In this situation the
register contents will remain the same after such a reset occurs.
Any register value, other than the four defined LVR values above, will also result in
the generation of an MCU reset. The reset operation will be activated after 2~3 LIRC
clock cycles. However in this situation the register contents will be reset to the POR
value.
• SMOD1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
x
0
0
“x” unknown
Bit 7
FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
Described elsewhere.
Bit 6~3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2
LVRF: reset caused by LVR function activation
0: not active
1: active
This bit can be clear to “0”, but can not set to “1”.
Bit 1
LRF: reset caused by LVRC setting
0: not active
1: active
This bit can be clear to “0”, but can not set to “1”.
Bit 0
WRF: reset caused by WE[4:0] setting
Described elsewhere.
Watchdog Time-out Reset during Normal Operation
The Watchdog time-out Reset during normal operation is the same as a hardware LVR reset except
that the Watchdog time-out flag TO will be set to “1”.
WDT Time-out Reset during Normal Operation Timing Chart
Rev. 1.40
66
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Watchdog Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode
The Watchdog time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode is a little different from other kinds
of reset. Most of the conditions remain unchanged except that the Program Counter and the Stack
Pointer will be cleared to "0" and the TO flag will be set to "1". Refer to the A.C. Characteristics for
tSST details.
WDT Time-out Reset during Sleep or IDLE Mode Timing Chart
Reset Initial Conditions
The different types of reset described affect the reset flags in different ways. These flags, known
as PDF and TO are located in the status register and are controlled by various microcontroller
operations, such as the SLEEP or IDLE Mode function or Watchdog Timer. The reset flags are
shown in the table:
TO
PDF
0
0
Power-on reset
Reset Conditions
u
u
LVR reset during Normal or SLOW Mode operation
1
u
WDT time-out reset during Normal or SLOW Mode operation
1
1
WDT time-out reset during IDLE or SLEEP Mode operation
Note: “u” stands for unchanged
The following table indicates the way in which the various components of the microcontroller are
affected after a power-on reset occurs.
Item
Rev. 1.40
Condition after Reset
Program Counter
Reset to zero
Interrupts
All interrupts will be disabled
WDT
Clear after reset, WDT begins counting
Timer Modules
Timer Modules
Input/Output Ports
I/O ports will be setup as inputs
Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack
67
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
The different kinds of resets all affect the internal registers of the microcontroller in different ways.
To ensure reliable continuation of normal program execution after a reset occurs, it is important to
know what condition the microcontroller is in after a particular reset occurs. The following table
describes how each type of reset affects each of the microcontroller internal registers. Note that where
more than one package type exists the table will reflect the situation for the larger package type.
Register
MP0
Rev. 1.40
Power On Reset
LVR Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(HALT)
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
MP1
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
BP
--0- -000
--0- -000
--0- -000
--u- -uuu
ACC
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PCL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
TBLP
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBLH
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBHP
--xx xxxx
--uu uuuu
--uu uuuu
--uu uuuu
STATUS
--00 xxxx
--uu uuuu
--1u uuuu
- - 11 u u u u
INTC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
INTC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFIC0
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFIC1
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
TBC
0 0 11 0 111
0 0 11 0 111
0 0 11 0 111
uuuu uuuu
PA
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PAC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PAPU
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
PAWK
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PB
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
PBC
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
PBPU
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
PC
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
-uuu uuuu
PCC
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
-uuu uuuu
PCPU
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
CTRL2
0010 100-
0010 100-
0010 100-
uuuu uuu-
CTRL3
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
CTRL1
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
VDDSPICR
0-00 0000
0-00 0000
0-00 0000
u-uu uuuu
ADRL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
ADRH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
ADCR
0 11 - 0 0 0 0
0 11 - 0 0 0 0
0 11 - 0 0 0 0
uuu- uuuu
ACSR
---0 0000
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
WDTC
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
uuuu uuuu
PD
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PDC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PDPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFIC2
-000 -000
-000 -000
-000 -000
-uuu -uuu
68
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Power On Reset
LVR Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(HALT)
MFIC3
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFIC4
0001 0000
0001 0000
0001 0000
uuuu uuuu
ANCSR
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
Register
Rev. 1.40
DAL
0000 ----
0000 ----
0000 ----
uuuu ----
DAH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
VOL
0000 ----
0000 ----
0000 ----
uuuu ----
LVDC
--00 -000
--00 -000
--00 -000
--uu -uuu
CCVREFC
00-- 0000
00-- 0000
00-- 0000
uu-- uuuu
PGAC0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PGAC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PGAC2
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
SCFC0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
SCFC1
-0x0 00--
-0x0 00--
-0x0 00--
-uuu uu--
SCFCKD
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
LCDCTRL
000- 0000
000- 0000
000- 0000
uuu- uuuu
SEGCR
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
VLCDC
0--- 0000
0--- 0000
0--- 0000
u--- uuuu
SPI0C0
111 - - - 0 -
111 - - - 0 -
111 - - - 0 -
uuu- --u-
SPI0C1
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
SPI0D
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
SPI1C0
111 - - - 0 -
111 - - - 0 -
111 - - - 0 -
uuu- --u-
SPI1C1
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
SPI1D
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
EEA
--xx xxxx
--xx xxxx
--xx xxxx
--uu uuuu
EED
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
LVRC
0101 0101
0101 0101
0101 0101
uuuu uuuu
TM0C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM0AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
TM1C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM2C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
TM2C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
69
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Power On Reset
LVR Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(HALT)
TM2DH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2AH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Register
TM2RP
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
SMOD0
0 0 0 0 0 0 11
0 0 0 0 0 0 11
0 0 0 0 0 0 11
uuuu uuuu
SMOD1
0--- -x00
0--- -x00
0--- -x00
u--- -uuu
SCKOC
---0 00-0
---0 00-0
---0 00-0
---u uu-u
CHPRC
0000 0-00
0000 0-00
0000 0-00
uuuu u-uu
FARL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FARH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD0L
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD0H
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD1L
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD1H
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD2L
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD2H
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD3L
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FD3H
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
EEC
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
FC0
0 111 0 0 0 0
0 111 0 0 0 0
0 111 0 0 0 0
uuuu uuuu
FC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FC2
---- ---0
---- ---0
---- ---0
---- ---u
Note: “u” stands for unchanged
“x” stands for unknown “-” stands for unimplemented
Rev. 1.40
70
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Input/Output Ports
Holtek microcontrollers offer considerable flexibility on their I/O ports. With the input or output
designation of every pin fully under user program control, pull-high selections for all ports and
wake-up selections on certain pins, the user is provided with an I/O structure to meet the needs of a
wide range of application possibilities.
The device provides bidirectional input/output lines labeled with port names PA~PD. These I/O
ports are mapped to the RAM Data Memory with specific addresses as shown in the Special Purpose
Data Memory table. All of these I/O ports can be used for input and output operations. For input
operation, these ports are non-latching, which means the inputs must be ready at the T2 rising edge
of instruction “MOV A, [m]”, where m denotes the port address. For output operation, all the data is
latched and remains unchanged until the output latch is rewritten.
I/O Register List
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PAWK
PAWK7
PAWK6
PAWK5
PAWK4
PAWK3
PAWK2
PAWK1
PAWK0
PAPU
—
PAPU6
PAPU5
PAPU4
PAPU3
PAPU2
PAPU1
PAPU0
PA
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
PAC
PAC7
PAC6
PAC5
PAC4
PAC3
PAC2
PAC1
PAC0
PBPU
—
—
PBPU5
PBPU4
PBPU3
PBPU2
PBPU1
PBPU0
PB
—
—
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
PBC
—
—
PBC5
PBC4
PBC3
PBC2
PBC1
PBC0
PCPU
—
PCPU6
PCPU5
PCPU4
PCPU3
PCPU2
PCPU1
PCPU0
PC
—
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
PCC
—
PCC6
PCC5
PCC4
PCC3
PCC2
PCC1
PCC0
PDPU
PDPU7
PDPU6
PDPU5
PDPU4
PDPU3
PDPU2
PDPU1
PDPU0
PD
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
PDC
PDC7
PDC6
PDC5
PDC4
PDC3
PDC2
PDC1
PDC0
Pull-high Resistors
Many product applications require pull-high resistors for their switch inputs usually requiring the
use of an external resistor. To eliminate the need for these external resistors, all I/O pins, when
configured as an input have the capability of being connected to an internal pull-high resistor. These
pull-high resistors are selected using registers PAPU~PDPU, and are implemented using weak
PMOS transistors. Note that pin PA7 does not have a pull-high resistor selection.
PAPU Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
PAPU6
PAPU5
PAPU4
PAPU3
PAPU2
PAPU1
PAPU0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
71
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
PBPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
PBPU5
PBPU4
PBPU3
PBPU2
PBPU1
PBPU0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
PCPU6
PCPU5
PCPU4
PCPU3
PCPU2
PCPU1
PCPU0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PDPU7
PDPU6
PDPU5
PDPU4
PDPU3
PDPU2
PDPU1
PDPU0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PCPU Register
PDPU Register
“—” Unimplemented, read as “0”
PAPUn/PBPUn/PCPUn/PDPUn: I/O Port Pull-high Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Port A Wake-up
The HALT instruction forces the microcontroller into the SLEEP or IDLE Mode which preserves
power, a feature that is important for battery and other low-power applications. Various methods
exist to wake-up the microcontroller, one of which is to change the logic condition on one of the Port
A pins from high to low. This function is especially suitable for applications that can be woken up
via external switches. Each pin on Port A can be selected individually to have this wake-up feature
using the PAWK register.
PAWK Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PAWK7
PAWK6
PAWK5
PAWK4
PAWK3
PAWK2
PAWK1
PAWK0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
PAWK7~PAWK0: Port A bit 7~bit 0 Wake-up Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
72
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
I/O Port Control Registers
Each I/O port has its own control register known as PAC~PDC, to control the input/output
configuration. Only the output for PA7 is open-drain output. With this control register, each CMOS
output or input can be reconfigured dynamically under software control. Each pin of the I/O ports is
directly mapped to a bit in its associated port control register. For the I/O pin to function as an input,
the corresponding bit of the control register must be written as a “1”. This will then allow the logic
state of the input pin to be directly read by instructions. When the corresponding bit of the control
register is written as a “0”, the I/O pin will be setup as a CMOS output. If the pin is currently setup
as an output, instructions can still be used to read the output register. However, it should be noted
that the program will in fact only read the status of the output data latch and not the actual logic
status of the output pin.
PAC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PAC7
PAC6
PAC5
PAC4
PAC3
PAC2
PAC1
PAC0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
PBC5
PBC4
PBC3
PBC2
PBC1
PBC0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
PBC Register
PCC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
PCC6
PCC5
PCC4
PCC3
PCC2
PCC1
PCC0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PDC7
PDC6
PDC5
PDC4
PDC3
PDC2
PDC1
PDC0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
“—” Unimplemented, read as “0”
PACn/PBCn/PCCn/PDCn: I/O Port Input/Output Control
0: Output
1: Input
Rev. 1.40
73
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SCKO Function
The SCKO Output allows the device to supply external hardware with a clock signal synchronised
to the microcontroller clock.
SCKO Operation
The SCKO function is controlled using the SCKOC register. As the pin, SCKO, is shared with PC1,
the required pin function is chosen via the SCKC bit in the SCKOC register. The clock source for
the SCKO Output is sourced from a divided ratio of the internal fSYS clock. The SCKC bit in is the
overall on/off control, setting SCKC bit to “1” enables the SCKO, setting SCKC bit to “0” disables
it. The required division ratio of the system clock is selected using the SCKS1 and SCKS0 bits in
the same register. If the SCKO is enabled, the output signal in the output mode of PC1 will be the
SCKO signal generated by the system clock. The input mode always remains its original functions.
Once the SCKO is selected, the SCKO output signal is controlled by PC1 data register only.
SCKOC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
SCKC
SCKS1
SCKS0
—
SCKOS
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
POR
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
0
Bit 7~5
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 4
SCKC: Select I/O or SCK output function
0: I/O
1: SCK output
Bit 3~2
SCKS1, SCKS0: SCK output frequency selection (SCKO pin)
00: fSYS/1
01: fSYS/2
10: fSYS/4
11: fSYS/8
Bit 1
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 0
SCKOS: PC1/SCKO output sink/source current option
0: normal I/O current
1: normal I/O current/2
I/O Pin Structures
The accompanying diagrams illustrate the internal structures of some generic I/O pin types. As
the exact logical construction of the I/O pin will differ from these drawings, they are supplied as a
guide only to assist with the functional understanding of the I/O pins. The wide range of pin-shared
structures does not permit all types to be shown.
Rev. 1.40
74
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Input/output port (PA7)
   
   Generic Input/Output Ports
Programming Considerations
Within the user program, one of the first things to consider is port initialisation. After a reset, all of
the I/O data and port control registers will be set high. This means that all I/O pins will default to
an input state, the level of which depends on the other connected circuitry and whether pull-high
selections have been chosen. If the port control registers, PAC~PDC, are then programmed to setup
some pins as outputs, these output pins will have an initial high output value unless the associated
port data registers, PA~PD, are first programmed. Selecting which pins are inputs and which are
outputs can be achieved byte-wide by loading the correct values into the appropriate port control
register or by programming individual bits in the port control register using the “SET [m].i” and
“CLR [m].i” instructions. Note that when using these bit control instructions, a read-modify-write
operation takes place. The microcontroller must first read in the data on the entire port, modify it to
the required new bit values and then rewrite this data back to the output ports.
Port A has the additional capability of providing wake-up functions. When the device is in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode, various methods are available to wake the device up. One of these is a high
to low transition of any of the Port A pins. Single or multiple pins on Port A can be setup to have this
function.
Rev. 1.40
75
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer Modules – TM
One of the most fundamental functions in any microcontroller device is the ability to control and
measure time. To implement time related functions each device includes several Timer Modules,
abbreviated to the name TM. The TMs are multi-purpose timing units and serve to provide
operations such as Timer/Counter, Input Capture, Compare Match Output and Single Pulse Output
as well as being the functional unit for the generation of PWM signals. Each of the TMs has either
two or three individual interrupts. The addition of input and output pins for each TM ensures that
users are provided with timing units with a wide and flexible range of features.
The common features of the different TM types are described here with more detailed information
provided in the individual Compact and Standard TM sections.
Introduction
The device contains from three TMs having a reference name of TM0, TM1, and TM2. Each
individual TM can be categorised as a certain type, namely Compact Type TM or Standard Type
TM. Although similar in nature, the different TM types vary in their feature complexity. The
common features to all of the Compact and Standard TMs will be described in this section, the
detailed operation regarding each of the TM types will be described in separate sections. The main
features and differences between the two types of TMs are summarised in the accompanying table.
CTM
STM
Timer/Counter
Function
√
√
I/P Capture
—
√
Compare Match Output
—
√
PWM Channels
1
1
Single Pulse Output
—
1
PWM Alignment
PWM Adjustment Period & Duty
Edge
Edge
Duty or Period
Duty or Period
This chip contains a specific number of either Compact Type and Standard Type TM units which are
shown in the table together with their individual reference names, TM0~TM2.
Device
TM0
TM1
TM2
HT45F3W
10-bit CTM
10-bit CTM
16-bit STM
TM Name/Type Reference
TM Operation
The two different types of TM offer a diverse range of functions, from simple timing operations
to PWM signal generation. The key to understanding how the TM operates is to see it in terms of
a free running counter whose value is then compared with the value of pre-programmed internal
comparators. When the free running counter has the same value as the pre-programmed comparator,
known as a compare match situation, a TM interrupt signal will be generated which can clear the
counter and perhaps also change the condition of the TM output pin. The internal TM counter is
driven by a user selectable clock source, which can be an internal clock or an external pin.
Rev. 1.40
76
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM Clock Source
The clock source which drives the main counter in each TM can originate from various sources.
The selection of the required clock source is implemented using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in the TM
control registers. The clock source can be a ratio of either the system clock fSYS or the internal high
clock fH, the fTBC clock source or the external TCKn pin. Note that setting these bits to the value 101
will select a reserved clock input, in effect disconnecting the TM clock source. The TCKn pin clock
source is used to allow an external signal to drive the TM as an external clock source or for event
counting.
TM Interrupts
The Compact and Standard type TMs each have two internal interrupts, one for each of the internal
comparator A or comparator P, which generate a TM interrupt when a compare match condition
occurs. When a TM interrupt is generated it can be used to clear the counter and also to change the
state of the TM output pin.
TM External Pins
Each of the TMs, irrespective of what type, has one TM input pin, with the label TCKn. The TM
input pin is essentially a clock source for the TM and is selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in
the TMnC0 register. This external TM input pin allows an external clock source to drive the internal
TM. This external TM input pin is shared with other functions but will be connected to the internal
TM if selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits. The TM input pin can be chosen to have either a
rising or falling active edge.
The TMs each have two output pins with the label TPn_0 and TPn_1. When the TM is in the
Compare Match Output Mode, these pins can be controlled by the TM to switch to a high or low
level or to toggle when a compare match situation occurs. The external TPn output pin is also the
pin where the TM generates the PWM output waveform. As the TM output pins are pin-shared with
other function, the TM output function must first be setup using registers. A single bit in one of the
registers determines if its associated pin is to be used as an external TM output pin or if it is to have
another function.
All TM output pin names have a “_n” suffix. Pin names that include a “_0” or “_1” suffix indicate
that they are from a TM with multiple output pins. This allows the TM to generate a complimentary
output pair, selected using the I/O register data bits.
Device
CTM
STM
HT45F3W
TP0_0, TP0_1,TP1_0, TP1_1
TP2_0, TP2_1
TM Output Pins
Rev. 1.40
77
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
The TM Counter Registers and the Capture/Compare CCRA registers, being either 10-bit or 16-bit,
all have a low and high byte structure. The high bytes can be directly accessed, but as the low bytes
can only be accessed via an internal 8-bit buffer, reading or writing to these register pairs must be
carried out in a specific way. The important point to note is that data transfer to and from the 8-bit
buffer and its related low byte only takes place when a write or read operation to its corresponding
high byte is executed.
 The following steps show the read and write procedures:
• Writing Data to CCRA
♦♦
Step 1. Write data to Low Byte TMxAL
– Note that here data is only written to the 8-bit buffer.
♦♦
Step 2. Write data to High Byte TMxAH
– Here data is written directly to the high byte registers and simultaneously data is latched
from the 8-bit buffer to the Low Byte registers.
• Reading Data from the Counter Registers and CCRA
♦♦
Step 1. Read data from the High Byte TMxDH or TMxAH
– Here data is read directly from the High Byte registers and simultaneously data is latched
from the Low Byte register into the 8-bit buffer.
♦♦
Step 2. Read data from the Low Byte TMxDL or TMxAL
– This step reads data from the 8-bit buffer.
As the CCRA register is implemented in the way shown in the following diagram and accessing
the register is carried out in a specific way described above, it is recommended to use the “MOV”
instruction to access the CCRA low byte register, named TMxAL, using the following access
procedures. Accessing the CCRA low byte register without following these access procedures will
result in unpredictable values.
Rev. 1.40
78
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Compact Type TM – CTM
Although the simplest form of the two TM types, the Compact TM type still contains three operating
modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/Event Counter and PWM Output modes. The
Compact TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive two external output
pins. These two external output pins can be the same signal or the inverse signal.
Name
TM No.
TM Input Pin
TM Output Pin
10-bit CTM
0, 1
TCK0, TCK1
TP0_0, TP0_1
TP1_0, TP1_1
Compact TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock
source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator
P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The
CCRP is three bits wide whose value is compared with the highest three bits in the counter while the
CCRA is the ten bits and therefore compares with all counter bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Compact
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources including an input pin and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are
selected using relevant internal registers.
€‚
ƒ ‚
€‚
„…
ƒ ‚
€† „ ‡
€† „‡ …
€ ˆ  ‰  Š  ‹
             
 
 
 
  ­ ­     Compact Type TM Block Digram (n=0 or 1)
Rev. 1.40
79
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Compact Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Compact TM is controlled using six registers. A read only register pair
exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store the
internal 10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the
different operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits.
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TMnC0
TnPAU
TnCK2
TnCK1
TnCK0
TnON
TnRP2
TnRP1
TnRP0
TMnC1
TnM1
TnM0
TnIO1
TnIO0
TnOC
TnPOL
TnDPX
TnCCLR
TMnDL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TMnDH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
TMnAL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TMnAH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
Compact TM Register List (n=0 or 1)
TMnC0 Register (n=0 or 1)
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T0PAU
T0CK2
T0CK1
T0CK0
T0ON
T0RP2
T0RP1
T0RP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
T0PAU: TM0 Counter Pause Control
0: Run
1: Pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up
and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit
changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes
to a low value again.
Bit 6~4
T0CK2~T0CK0: Select TM0 Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: Reserved
110: TCK0 rising edge clock
111: TCK0 falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved
clock input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source
can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the
system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be
found in the oscillator section.
80
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3
Bit 2~0
Rev. 1.40
T0ON: TM0 Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the
counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the
counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption.
When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset
to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will
retain its residual value. If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM
output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the T0OC bit, when the
T0ON bit changes from low to high.
T0RP2~T0RP0: TM0 CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the TM0 Counter bit 9~bit
7 Comparator P Match Period
000: 1024 TM0 clocks
001: 128 TM0 clocks
010: 256 TM0 clocks
011: 384 TM0 clocks
100: 512 TM0 clocks
101: 640 TM0 clocks
110: 768 TM0 clocks
111: 896 TM0 clocks
These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which
are then compared with the internal counter’s highest three bits. The result of this
comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the T0CCLR bit is set to
zero. Setting the T0CCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP
values will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the
highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128 clock cycle multiples.
Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its
maximum value.
81
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TMnC1 Register (n=0 or 1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TnM1
TnM0
TnIO1
TnIO0
TnOC
TnPOL
TnDPX
TnCCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rev. 1.40
Bit 7~6
TnM1, TnM0: Select TMn Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Undefined
10: PWM Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation
the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the TnM1 and TnM0
bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
Bit 5~4
TnIO1, TnIO0: Select TPn_0, TPn_1 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode
00: PWM Output inactive state
01: PWM Output active state
10: PWM output
11: Undefined
Timer/Counter Mode Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the TM is running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits determine how the
TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present
state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both
zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output
pin should be setup using the TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register. Note that the output
level requested by the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits must be different from the initial value
setup using the TnOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when
a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state, it can be reset to its
initial level by changing the level of the TnON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin
changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output
function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to only change the
values of the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits only after the TMn has been switched off.
Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are changed when
the TM is running.
82
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3
TnOC: TPn_0, TPn_1 Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode.
It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output
Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match
occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active
low.
Bit 2
TnPOL: TPn_0, TPn_1 Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TPn_0 or TPn_1 output pin. When the bit is set
high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no
effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1
TnDPX: TMn PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and
duty control of the PWM waveform.
Bit 0
TnCCLR: Select TMn Counter clear condition
0: TMn Comparatror P match
1: TMn Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the
Compact TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of
which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the TnCCLR bit set high,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from
the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can
only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The TnCCLR bit is not
used in the PWM Mode.
TMnDL Register (n=0 or 1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
D7~D0: TMn Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
83
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TMnDH Register (n=0 or 1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1~0
D9~D8: TMn Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8
TMnAL Register (n=0 or 1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: TMn CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMnAH Register (n=0 or 1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1~0
D9~D8: TMn CCRA High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8
Compact Type TM Operating Modes
The Compact Type TM can operate in one of three operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating mode is selected using the TnM1 and TnM0
bits in the TMnC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register, should be set to 00 respectively.
In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are
a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when
a compare match occurs from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which
allows the counter to overflow. Here both TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags for the Comparator
A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. If the CCRA bits are all zero, the
counter will overflow when its reaches its maximum 10-bit, 3FF Hex, value, however here the TnAF
interrupt request flag will not be generated.
Rev. 1.40
84
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin will change
state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a TnAF interrupt request flag
is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The TnPF interrupt request flag,
generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output
pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the
TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnIO1
and TnIO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match
occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the
TnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the TnOC bit. Note that if the TnIO1 and TnIO0
bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Counte� Value
Counte� ove�flow
CCRP=0
0x3FF
TnCCLR = 0; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counte� clea�ed �y CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counte�
Resta�t
Resu�e
CCRP
Pause
CCRA
�to�
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
Out�ut �in set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Out�ut not affected �y TnAF
flag. Re�ains High until �eset
�y TnON �it
Out�ut Toggle with
TnAF flag
He�e TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Out�ut select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Out�ut select
Out�ut Inve�ts
when TnPOL is high
Out�ut Pin
Reset to Initial value
Out�ut cont�olled �y
othe� �in-sha�ed function
Compare Match Output Mode - TnCCLR = 0 (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. With TnCCLR=0, a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.40
85
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counte� ove�flow
CCRA > 0 Counte� clea�ed �y CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resu�e
CCRA
Pause
�to�
Counte� Resta�t
CCRP
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
No TnAF flag
gene�ated on
CCRA ove�flow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TnPF not
gene�ated
Out�ut does
not change
TM O/P Pin
Out�ut �in set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Out�ut not affected �y
TnAF flag. Re�ains High
until �eset �y TnON �it
Out�ut Toggle with
TnAF flag
He�e TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Out�ut select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Out�ut select
Out�ut Inve�ts
when TnPOL is high
Out�ut Pin
Reset to Initial value
Out�ut cont�olled �y
othe� �in-sha�ed function
Compare Match Output Mode - TnCCLR = 1 (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. With TnCCLR=1, a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1
Rev. 1.40
86
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 11 respectively.
The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode
generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output
pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match
Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode,
the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively.
The PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor
control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but
of varying duty cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with
varying equivalent DC RMS values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit has no effect on the PWM
operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one
register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while
the other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency
or duty cycle is determined using the TnDPX bit in the TMnC1 register. The PWM waveform
frequency and duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnPOL bit is
used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
• CTM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnDPX=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
000b
Period
128
256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b and CCRA = 128,
The CTM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4)/512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125 kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
• CTM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnDPX=1
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
Period
Duty
101b
110b
111b
000b
768
896
1024
CCRA
128
256
384
512
640
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock
while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value.
Rev. 1.40
87
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX = 0; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counte� clea�ed
�y CCRP
Counte� Reset when
TnON �etu�ns high
CCRP
Pause Resu�e
CCRA
Counte� �to� if
TnON �it low
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set �y CCRA
PWM Pe�iod
set �y CCRP
PWM �esu�es
o�e�ation
Out�ut cont�olled �y
Out�ut Inve�ts
othe� �in-sha�ed function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode - TnDPX = 0 (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. Here TnDPX=0 – Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.40
88
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX = 1; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counte� clea�ed
�y CCRA
Counte� Reset when
TnON �etu�ns high
CCRA
Pause Resu�e
CCRP
Counte� �to� if
TnON �it low
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set �y CCRP
PWM Pe�iod
set �y CCRA
PWM �esu�es
o�e�ation
Out�ut cont�olled �y
Out�ut Inve�ts
othe� �in-sha�ed function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode - TnDPX = 1 (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. Here TnDPX = 1 – Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.40
89
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standard Type TM – STM
The Standard Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/
Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Standard TM can
also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive two external output pins.
Name
TM No.
TM Input Pin
TM Output Pin
16-bit STM
2
TCK2
TP2_0, TP2_1
Standard TM Operation
There is a 16-bit wide STM. At the core is a 16-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user
selectable internal or external clock source. There are also two internal comparators with the names,
Comparator A and Comparator P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with
CCRP and CCRA registers. The CCRP comparator is 8-bit wide whose value is compared the with
highest 8 bits in the counter while the CCRA is the sixteen bits and therefore compares all counter
bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 16-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the T2ON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Standard
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources including an input pin and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are
selected using relevant internal registers.
†‡
ˆ ‡
†‡
‰
ˆ ‡
†Š  †Š  ‰
† ‹  Œ  Ž  ­
          
 „
 
ƒ  ƒ  
  … …     ƒ  ­ € 
‚   Standard Type TM Block Digram
Rev. 1.40
90
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standard Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Standard TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only register
pair exists to store the internal counter 16-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store
the internal 16-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the
different operating and control modes as well as the eight CCRP bits.
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TM2C0
T2PAU
T2CK2
T2CK1
T2CK0
T2ON
—
—
—
TM2C1
T2M1
T2M0
T2IO1
T2IO0
T2OC
T2POL
T2DPX
T2CCLR
TM2DL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM2DH
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TM2AL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM2AH
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TM2RP
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
16-bit Standard TM Register List
TM2C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T2PAU
T2CK2
T2CK1
T2CK0
T2ON
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
POR
Bit 7
Bit 6~4
Bit 3
Bit 2~0
Rev. 1.40
T2PAU: TM2 Counter Pause Control
0: Run
1: Pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up
and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit
changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes
to a low value again.
T2CK2~T2CK0: Select TM2 Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: Reserved
110: TCK2 rising edge clock
111: TCK2 falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved
clock input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source
can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the
system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be
found in the oscillator section.
T2ON: TM2 Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the
counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the
counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption.
When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset
to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will
retain its residual value. If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM
output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the T2OC bit, when the
T2ON bit changes from low to high.
Unimplemented, read as “0”
91
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM2C1 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T2M1
T2M0
T2IO1
T2IO0
T2OC
T2POL
T2DPX
T2CCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
T2M1, T2M0: Select TM2 Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation
the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the T2M1 and T2M0
bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
Bit 5~4
T2IO1, T2IO0: Select TP2_0, TP2_1 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM Output inactive state
01: PWM Output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of TP2_0, TP2_1
01: Input capture at falling edge of TP2_0, TP2_1
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP2_0, TP2_1
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/Counter Mode Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the TM is running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits determine how the
TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present
state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both
zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output
pin should be setup using the T2OC bit in the TM2C1 register. Note that the output
level requested by the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits must be different from the initial value
setup using the T2OC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when
a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state, it can be reset to its
initial level by changing the level of the T2ON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits determine how the TM output pin
changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output
function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to only change
the values of the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off.
Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits are changed when
the TM is running.
92
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3
T2OC: TP2_0, TP2_1 Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/
Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In
the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin
before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is
active high or active low.
Bit 2
T2POL: TP2_0, TP2_1 Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TP2_0 or TP2_1 output pin. When the bit is set
high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no
effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1
T2DPX: TM2 PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and
duty control of the PWM waveform.
Bit 0
T2CCLR: Select TM2 Counter clear condition
0: TM2 Comparatror P match
1: TM2 Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the
Compact TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of
which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the T2CCLR bit set high,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from
the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can
only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The T2CCLR bit is not
used in the PWM Mode, Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode.
TM2DL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: TM2 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2 16-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2DH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
D15~D8: TM2 Counter High Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2 16-bit Counter bit 15 ~ bit 8
93
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM2AL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: TM2 CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2 16-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2AH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~~0
D15~D8: TM2 CCRA High Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2 16-bit CCRA bit 15 ~ bit 8
TM2RP Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: TM2 CCRP Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM2 CCRP 8-bit register, compared with the TM2 Counter bit 15 ~ bit 8. Comparator
P Match Period
0: 65536 TM2 clocks
1~255: 256×(1~255) TM2 clocks
These eight bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 8-bit register, which
are then compared with the internal counter’s highest eight bits. The result of this
comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the T2CCLR bit is set to
zero. Setting the T2CCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP
values will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the
highest eight counter bits, the compare values exist in 256 clock cycle multiples.
Clearing all eight bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its
maximum value.
Standard Type TM Operating Modes
The Standard Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The
operating mode is selected using the T2M1 and T2M0 bits in the TM2C1 register.
Compare Output Mode
To select this mode, bits T2M1 and T2M0 in the TM2C1 register, should be set to 00 respectively.
In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are
a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the T2CCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when
a compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows
the counter to overflow. Here both T2AF and T2PF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and
Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
Rev. 1.40
94
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
If the T2CCLR bit in the TM2C1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the T2AF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
T2CCLR is high no T2PF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match Output
Mode, the CCRA can not be set to “0”.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change
state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a T2AF interrupt request flag
is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The T2PF interrupt request flag,
generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output
pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the
T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits in the TM2C1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the T2IO1
and T2IO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match
occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the
T2ON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the T2OC bit. Note that if the T2IO1 and T2IO0
bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
C o u n te � V a lu e
C o u n te � o v e �flo w
T n C C L R = 0 ; T n M [1 :0 ] = 0 0
CCRP > 0
C o u n te � c le a �e d � y C C R P v a lu e
CCRP=0
0xFFFF
CCRP > 0
C ounte�
R esta�t
R esu� e
CCRP
P ause
CCRA
� to�
T i� e
TnO N
TnPAU
TnPO L
C C R P In t.
F la g T n P F
C C R A In t.
F la g T n A F
T M O /P P in
O u t� u t � in s e t to
in itia l L e v e l L o w
if T n O C = 0
O u t� u t n o t a ffe c te d � y T n A F
fla g . R e � a in s H ig h u n til �e s e t
� y T n O N � it
O u t� u t T o g g le w ith
T n A F fla g
H e �e T n IO [1 :0 ] = 1 1
T o g g le O u t� u t s e le c t
N o te T n IO [1 :0 ] = 1 0
A c tiv e H ig h O u t� u t s e le c t
O u t� u t In v e �ts
w h e n T n P O L is h ig h
O u t� u t P in
R e s e t to In itia l v a lu e
O u t� u t c o n t�o lle d � y
o th e � � in -s h a �e d fu n c tio n
Compare Match Output Mode - TnCCLR = 0 (n=2)
Note: 1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to itsinitial state by a TnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.40
95
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00
Counte� Value
CCRA = 0
Counte� ove�flows
CCRA > 0 Counte� clea�ed �y CCRA value
0xFFFF
CCRA = 0
CCRA
Pause Resu�e
Counte�
Reset
�to�
CCRP
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
No TnAF flag
gene�ated on
CCRA ove�flow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TnPF not
gene�ated
TM O/P Pin
Out�ut Pin set
to Initial Level
Low if TnOC = 0
Out�ut
does
not change
Out�ut not affected �y
TnAF flag �e�ains High
until �eset �y TnON �it
Out�ut Toggle
with TnAF flag
Now TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Out�ut
�elect
Out�ut cont�olled �y
othe� �in-sha�ed function
He�e TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Out�ut �elect
Out�ut inve�ts
when TnPOL is high
Out�ut Pin
Reset to initial value
Compare Match Output Mode - TnCCLR = 1 (n=2)
Note: 1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. A TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1
Rev. 1.40
96
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits T2M1 and T2M0 in the TM2C1 register should be set to 11 respectively.
The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode
generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output
pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match
Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode,
the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits T2M1 and T2M0 in the TM2C1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within
the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control,
illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the
TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS
values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the T2CCLR bit has no effect as the PWM
period. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one register
is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the other
one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency or duty cycle
is determined using the T2DPX bit in the TM2C1 register. The PWM waveform frequency and duty
cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The T2OC bit in the TM2C1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The T2POL bit is
used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
• 16-bit STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T2DPX=0
CCRP
1~255
000b
Period
CCRP×256
65536
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source select fSYS/4, CCRP = 2 and CCRA = 128,
The STM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4)/(2×256) = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125kHz, duty = 128/(2×256)
= 25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
• 16-bit STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T2DPX=1
CCRP
1~255
Period
000b
CCRA
CCRP×256
Duty
65536
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock
while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the (CCRP×256) except when the CCRP value is equal to
000b.
Rev. 1.40
97
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX = 0; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counte� clea�ed
�y CCRP
Counte� Reset when
TnON �etu�ns high
CCRP
Pause Resu�e
CCRA
Counte� �to� if
TnON �it low
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set �y CCRA
PWM Pe�iod
set �y CCRP
PWM �esu�es
o�e�ation
Out�ut cont�olled �y
Out�ut Inve�ts
othe� �in-sha�ed function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode - TnDPX = 0 (n=2)
Note: 1. Here TnDPX=0 – Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.40
98
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX = 1; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counte� clea�ed
�y CCRA
Counte� Reset when
TnON �etu�ns high
CCRA
Pause Resu�e
CCRP
Counte� �to� if
TnON �it low
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set �y CCRP
PWM Pe�iod
set �y CCRA
PWM �esu�es
o�e�ation
Out�ut cont�olled �y
Out�ut Inve�ts
othe� �in-sha�ed function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode - TnDPX = 1 (n=2)
Note: 1. Here TnDPX=1 – Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.40
99
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Single Pulse Mode
To select this mode, bits T2M1 and T2M0 in the TM2C1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode,
as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the TM output pin.
The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the T2ON bit, which can
be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the T2ON bit
can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external TCK2 pin, which will
in turn initiate the Single Pulse output. When the T2ON bit transitions to a high level, the counter
will start running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The T2ON bit should remain high
when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated when the
T2ON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a
compare match occurs from Comparator A.
            Single Pulse Generation (n=2)
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the T2ON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control
the pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate a TM interrupt. The counter
can only be reset back to zero when the T2ON bit changes from low to high when the counter
restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The T2CCLR and T2DPX bits are not used in
this Mode.
Rev. 1.40
100
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnM [1:0] = 10 ; TnIO [1:0] = 11
Counte� sto��ed
�y CCRA
Counte� Reset when
TnON �etu�ns high
CCRA
Pause
Counte� �to�s
�y softwa�e
Resu�e
CCRP
Ti�e
TnON
�oftwa�e
T�igge�
Auto. set �y
TCKn �in
Clea�ed �y
CCRA �atch
TCKn �in
�oftwa�e
T�igge�
�oftwa�e
�oftwa�e T�igge�
Clea�
�oftwa�e
T�igge�
TCKn �in
T�igge�
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
No CCRP Inte��u�ts
gene�ated
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
Out�ut Inve�ts
when TnPOL = 1
Pulse Width
set �y CCRA
Single Pulse Mode (n=2)
Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or by setting the TnON bit high
4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit hight
5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnIO [1:0] must be set to “11” and can not be changed.
Rev. 1.40
101
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits T2M1 and T2M0 in the TM2C1 register should be set to 01 respectively.
This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter
and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external signal is
supplied on the TP2_0 or TP2_1 pin, whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or
both rising and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the T2IO1 and T2IO0
bits in the TM2C1 register. The counter is started when the T2ON bit changes from low to high
which is initiated using the application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the TP2_0 or TP2_1 pin the present value in the
counter will be latched into the CCRA registers and a TM interrupt generated. Irrespective of what
events occur on the TP2_0 or TP2_1 pin the counter will continue to free run until the T2ON bit
changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs the counter will reset back to zero;
in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP
compare match occurs from Comparator P, a TM interrupt will also be generated. Counting the
number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long
pulse widths. The T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits can select the active trigger edge on the TP2_0 or TP2_1
pin to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If the T2IO1 and T2IO0 bits are both set
high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the TP2_0 or TP2_1
pin, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run.
As the TP2_0 or TP2_1 pin is pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the TM is in the
Input Capture Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on this pin
may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The T2CCLR and T2DPX bits are not used in
this Mode.
Rev. 1.40
102
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnM [1:0] = 01
Counte� clea�ed
�y CCRP
Counte� Counte�
�to�
Reset
CCRP
YY
Pause
Resu�e
XX
Ti�e
TnON
TnPAU
TM ca�tu�e
�in TPn_x
Active
edge
Active
edge
Active edge
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA
Value
TnIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00 – Rising edge
YY
01 – Falling edge
XX
10 – Both edges
YY
11 – Disa�le Ca�tu�e
Capture Input Mode (n=2)
Note: 1. TnM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnIO [1:0] bits
2. A TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRA
3. TnCCLR bit not used
4. No output function – TnOC and TnPOL bits are not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is
equal to zero.
Rev. 1.40
103
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Analog to Digital Converter – ADC
The need to interface to real world analog signals is a common requirement for many electronic
systems. However, to properly process these signals by a microcontroller, they must first be
converted into digital signals by A/D converters. By integrating the A/D conversion electronic
circuitry into the microcontroller, the need for external components is reduced significantly with the
corresponding follow-on benefits of lower costs and reduced component space requirements.
A/D Overview
The device contains a multi-channel analog to digital converter, channel 0~3 are for external signal
input, channel 4~7 are for the PGA and Battery Detect functions.
The accompanying block diagram shows the overall internal structure of the A/D converter, together
with its associated registers.
PB0
A/D Converter Structure
A/D Converter Data Registers – ADRL, ADRH
As the internal A/D converter provides a 12 bit digital conversation value it requires two data
registers, a high byte register, known as ADRH, and a low byte register, known as ADRL. After the
conversion process takes place, these registers can be directly read by the microcontroller to obtain
the digitised conversion value. For a single conversion value, that is when the ACCM bit is zero, the
12 bit converted value is stored in bits 0-11. For the conversion accumulation mode, that is when the
ACCM bit is high, the full 16-bits are used, therefore the full 16-bits are used.
ADRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
D7~D0: ADC data register bit 7 ~ bit 0
ADRH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
D15~D8: ADC data register bit 15 ~ bit 8
When bit ACCM is set to 1, D12 to D15 is valid.
104
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Converter Control Registers – ADCR, ACSR, ANCSR
To control the function and operation of the A/D converter, three control registers known as ADCR,
ACSR and ANCSR are provided. These 8-bit registers define functions such as the selection of
which analog channel is connected to the internal A/D converter, the A/D clock source as well
as controlling the start function and monitoring the A/D converter end of conversion status. The
ACS2~ACS0 bits in the ADCR register define the ADC input channel number. As the device
contains only one actual analog to digital converter hardware circuit, each of the individual 8 analog
inputs must be routed to the converter. It is the function of the ACS2~ACS0 bits to determine which
analog channel input pin is actually connected to the internal A/D converter.
The ANCSR control register contains the PCR3~PCR0 bits which determine which pins on Port B
are used as analog inputs for the A/D converter input and which pins are not to be used as the A/D
converter input. Setting the corresponding bit high will select the A/D input function, clearing the
bit to zero will select either the I/O or other pin-shared function. When the pin is selected to be an
A/D input, its original function whether it is an I/O or other pin-shared function will be removed. In
addition, any internal pull-high resistors connected to these pins will be automatically removed if the
pin is selected to be an A/D input.
ADCR Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
START
EOCB
ADOFF
—
IDLE_CONV
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
1
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
START: Start the A/D conversion
0→1→0: Start
0→1: Reset the A/D converter and set EOCB to “1”
This bit is used to initiate an A/D conversion process. The bit is normally low but if set
high and then cleared low again, the A/D converter will initiate a conversion process.
When the bit is set high the A/D converter will be reset.
Bit 6
EOCB: End of A/D conversion flag
0: A/D conversion ended
1: A/D conversion in progress
This read only flag is used to indicate when an A/D conversion process has completed.
When the conversion process is running, the bit will be high.
Bit 5
ADOFF: ADC module power on/off control bit
0: ADC module power on
1: ADC module power off
This bit controls the power to the A/D internal function. This bit should be cleared
to zero to enable the A/D converter. If the bit is set high then the A/D converter will
be switched off reducing the device power consumption. As the A/D converter will
consume a limited amount of power, even when not executing a conversion, this may
be an important consideration in power sensitive battery powered applications.
Note: 1. It is recommended to set ADOFF=1 before entering IDLE/SLEEP Mode for
saving power.
2. ADOFF=1 will power down the ADC module.
Bit 4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3
IDLE_CONV: MCU halt mode
0: disable
1: enable
When MCU halt mode is enabled, if ADC conversion is in working, the MCU will enter
halt mode. And peripheral is not affected.
105
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 2~0
ACS2~ACS0: Select A/D channel
000: AN0 (PB0)
001: AN1 (PB1)
010: AN2 (PB2)
011: AN3 (PB3)
100: AN4 (PGA2 output)
101: AN5 (SCF PGA output)
110: AN6 (PGA1 output)
111: AN7 (Battery Voltage Detect input)
ACSR Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
VREFS
ACCM
ADCK2
ADCK1
ADCK0
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2~0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
VREFS: A/D voltage reference select bit
0: VREF use the internal AVDD, so the external pin is used as an I/O function pin or anlog input.
1: VREF use the external analog input voltage.
ACCM: Conversion Accumulation Mode.
0: disable
1: enable
When the Conversion Accumulation function is enabled the A/D interrupt is enabled,
the A/D will convert 16 times continuously and the accumulated value will be stored
in the full 16-bits of registers ADRL and ADRH. After the 16 conversions have
completed, the EOCB bit will be automatically cleared to zero and an A/D converter
interrupt generated if it is enabled.
ADCK2~ADCK0: Select ADC clock source
000: fSYS/2
001: fSYS/8
010: fSYS/32
011: Undefined
100: fSYS
101: fSYS/4
110: fSYS/64
111: Undefined
ANCSR Register
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
PCR3
PCR2
PCR1
PCR0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.40
7
Unimplemented, read as “0”
PCR3: Define PB3 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN3
PCR2: Define PB2 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN2
PCR1: Define PB1 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN1
PCR0: Define PB0 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN0 or VREF
106
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Operation
The START bit in the ADCR register is used to start and reset the A/D converter. When the
microcontroller sets this bit from low to high and then low again, an analog to digital conversion
cycle will be initiated. When the START bit is brought from low to high but not low again, the
EOCB bit in the ADCR register will be set high and the analog to digital converter will be reset. It
is the START bit that is used to control the overall start operation of the internal analog to digital
converter.
The EOCB bit in the ADCR register is used to indicate when the analog to digital conversion process
is complete. This bit will be automatically set to “0” by the microcontroller after a conversion cycle
has ended. In addition, the corresponding A/D interrupt request flag will be set in the interrupt
control register, and if the interrupts are enabled, an appropriate internal interrupt signal will be
generated. This A/D internal interrupt signal will direct the program flow to the associated A/D
internal interrupt address for processing. If the A/D internal interrupt is disabled, the microcontroller
can be used to poll the EOCB bit in the ADCR register to check whether it has been cleared as an
alternative method of detecting the end of an A/D conversion cycle.
The clock source for the A/D converter, which originates from the system clock fSYS, can be chosen
to be either fSYS or a subdivided version of fSYS The division ratio value is determined by the
ADCK2~ADCK0 bits in the ACSR register.
Controlling the power on/off function of the A/D converter circuitry is implemented using the
ADOFF bit in the ADCR register. This bit must be zero to power on the A/D converter. When the
ADOFF bit is cleared to zero to power on the A/D converter internal circuitry a certain delay, as
indicated in the timing diagram, must be allowed before an A/D conversion is initiated. Even if no
pins are selected for use as A/D inputs by clearing the PCR3~PCR0 bits in the ANCSR registers, if
the ADOFF bit is zero then some power will still be consumed. In power conscious applications it
is therefore recommended that the ADOFF is set high to reduce power consumption when the A/D
converter function is not being used.
The reference voltage supply to the A/D Converter can be supplied from either the positive power
supply pin, VDD, or from an external reference sources supplied on pin VREF. The desired selection
is made using the VREFS bit. As the VREF pin is pin-shared with other functions, when the VREFS
bit is set high, the VREF pin function will be selected and the other pin functions will be disabled
automatically.
Conversion Accumulation Mode
Each single A/D conversion operation provides a 12-bit wide digital conversion value. If the ACCM
bit is zero then only a single A/D conversion process will take place. However if the ACCM bit
is set high then the A/D converter will be in the conversion accumulation mode. In this mode,
16 repetitive A/D conversion operations are made with each new converted value being added to
the previous accumulated value. After the 16 conversion values, each of 12-bits in length, have
completed and added together, a resulting 16-bit wide digital value is obtained and stored in the two
A/D data registers. However it must be noted that, although the accumulated result provides a full
16-bit value, only the 13 higher bits, 16 bits will be valid. When in this mode the EOCB bit will be
cleared to zero after 16 conversion operations have completed.
Rev. 1.40
107
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Input Pins
Some of the A/D analog input pins are pin-shared with the I/O pins on Port B as well as other
functions. The PCR3~PCR0 bits in the ANCSR register, determine whether the input pins are
setup as A/D converter analog inputs or whether they have other functions. If the PCR3~PCR0
bits for its corresponding pin is set high then the pins will be setup to be an A/D converter input
and the original pin functions disabled. In this way, pins can be changed under program control to
change their function between A/D inputs and other functions. All pull-high resistors, which are
setup through register programming, will be automatically disconnected if the pins are setup as A/
D inputs. Note that it is not necessary to first setup the A/D pin as an input in the PBC port control
register to enable the A/D input as when the PCR3~PCR0 bits enable an A/D input, the status of the
port control register will be overridden.
The A/D converter has its own reference voltage pin, VREF, however the reference voltage can also
be supplied from the power supply pin, a choice which is made through the VREFS bit in the ACSR
register. The analog input values must not be allowed to exceed the value of VREF.
PB0
A/D Input Structure
AN4~AN6 are three A/D internal inputs. AN4, AN5 and AN6 are connected to PGA2 output,
PGA1output and the SCF PGA output respectively.
�VIP
�VIN
V+
V-
To ADC AN6
VPGAO1
PGA1
PGA�
�CF
PGA
�CFR
�LPF
R1
R�
VPGAO�
To ADC AN4
V�CF
To ADC AN�
�CFC
C1
C3
C�
Rev. 1.40
108
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
AN7 is an internal A/D input which is connected to the battery voltage detector. When the battery
voltage detector is enabled the A/D can be used to measure the battery voltage.
VDD
10K
To ADC AN�
3.3K
Battery Voltage Detector
Summary of A/D Conversion Steps
The following summarises the individual steps that should be executed in order to implement an A/
D conversion process.
• Step 1
Select the required A/D conversion clock by correctly programming bits ADCK2~ADCK0 in the
ACSR register.
• Step 2
Enable the A/D by clearing the ADOFF bit in the ADCR register to zero.
• Step 3
Select which channel is to be connected to the internal A/D converter by correctly programming
the ACS2~ACS0 bits which are also contained in the ADCR register.
• Step 4
Select which pins are to be used as A/D inputs and configure them by correctly programming the
PCR3~PCR0 bits in the ANCSR register.
• Step 5
If the interrupts are to be used, the interrupt control registers must be correctly configured to
ensure the A/D converter interrupt function is active. The master interrupt control bit, EMI, and
the A/D converter interrupt bit, ADE, must both be set high to do this.
• Step 6
The analog to digital conversion process can now be initialised by setting the START bit in
the ADCR register from low to high and then low again. Note that this bit should have been
originally cleared to zero.
• Step 7
To check when the analog to digital conversion process is complete, the EOCB bit in the ADCR
register can be polled. The conversion process is complete when this bit goes low. When this
occurs the A/D data registers ADRL and ADRH can be read to obtain the conversion value. As an
alternative method, if the interrupts are enabled and the stack is not full, the program can wait for
an A/D interrupt to occur.
Note: When checking for the end of the conversion process, if the method of polling the EOCB
bit in the ADCR register is used, the interrupt enable step above can be omitted.
Rev. 1.40
109
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
The accompanying diagram shows graphically the various stages involved in an analog to digital
conversion process and its associated timing. After an A/D conversion process has been initiated
by the application program, the microcontroller internal hardware will begin to carry out the
conversion, during which time the program can continue with other functions. The time taken for the
A/D conversion is 16tAD where tAD is equal to the A/D clock period.
Note that when in the Conversion Accumulation Mode, 16 conversion cycles will be required before
the EOCB bit is cleared to zero.
A/D Single Conversion Mode Timing
Programming Considerations
During microcontroller operations where the A/D converter is not being used, the A/D internal
circuitry can be switched off to reduce power consumption, by setting bit ADOFF high in the ADCR
register. When this happens, the internal A/D converter circuits will not consume power irrespective
of what analog voltage is applied to their input lines. If the A/D converter input lines are used as
normal I/Os, then care must be taken as if the input voltage is not at a valid logic level, then this may
lead to some increase in power consumption.
The power-on reset condition of the A/D converter control registers will ensure that the shared
function pins are setup as A/D converter inputs. If any of the A/D converter input pins are to be used
for functions, then the A/D converter control register bits must be properly setup to disable the A/D
input configuration.
A/D Transfer Function
As the device contains a 12-bit A/D converter, its full-scale converted digitised value is equal to
FFFH. Since the full-scale analog input value is equal to the VDD or VREF voltage, this gives a single
bit analog input value of VDD or VREF divided by 4096.
1 LSB = (VDD or VREF) ÷ 4096
The A/D Converter input voltage value can be calculated using the following equation:
A/D input voltage = A/D output digital value × (VDD or VREF) ÷ 4096
Rev. 1.40
110
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
The diagram shows the ideal transfer function between the analog input value and the digitised
output value for the A/D converter. Except for the digitised zero value, the subsequent digitised
values will change at a point 0.5 LSB below where they would change without the offset, and the
last full scale digitised value will change at a point 1.5 LSB below the VDD or VREF level.
    
 
      Ideal A/D Transfer Function
A/D Programming Example
The following two programming examples illustrate how to setup and implement an A/D
conversion. In the first example, the method of polling the EOCB bit in the ADCR register is used to
detect when the conversion cycle is complete, whereas in the second example, the A/D interrupt is
used to determine when the conversion is complete.
Example: using an EOCB polling method to detect the end of conversion
clr
ADE; disable ADC interrupt
mov a, 01H
mov ACSR ; select fSYS/8 as A/D clock
clr ADOFF
mov a, 0FH ; setup ANCSR to configure pins AN0~AN3
mov ANCSR,a
mov a, 00H ; setup ADCR register to configure Port as A/D inputs
mov ADCR, a ; and select AN0 to be connected to the A/D converter
:
:
Start_conversion:
clr START
set START ; reset A/D
clr START ; start A/D
Polling_EOC:
sz EOCB ; poll the ADCR register EOCB bit to detect end
; of A/D conversion
jmp polling_EOC ; continue polling
mov a, ADRL ; read low byte conversion result value
mov adrl_buffer, a ; save result to user defined register
mov a, ADRH ; read high byte conversion result value
mov adrh_buffer, a ; save result to user defined register
:
jmp start_conversion ; start next A/D conversion
Note: To power off the ADC, it is necessary to set ADOFF as “1”.
Rev. 1.40
111
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Example: using the interrupt method to detect the end of conversion
clr
ADE; disable ADC interrupt
mov a, 01H
mov ACSR ; select fSYS/8 as A/D clock
clr ADOFF
mov a, 0FH ; setup ANCSR to configure pins AN0~AN3
mov ANCSR,a
mov a, 00H ; setup ADCR register to configure Port as A/D inputs
mov ADCR, a ; and select AN0 to be connected to the A/D
:
:
Start_conversion:
clr START
set START ; reset A/D
clr START ; start A/D
clr ADF ; clear ADC interrupt request flag
set
ADE; enable ADC interrupt
set EMI ; enable global interrupt
:
:
; ADC interrupt service routine
ADC_:
mov acc_stack, a ; save ACC to user defined memory
mov a, STATUS
mov status_stack, a ; save STATUS to user defined memory
:
:
mov a, ADRL ; read low byte conversion result value
mov adrl_buffer, a ; save result to user defined register
mov a, ADRH ; read high byte conversion result value
mov adrh_buffer, a ; save result to user defined register
:
:
EXIT_ISR:
mov a, status_stack
mov STATUS, a ; restore STATUS from user defined memory
mov a, acc_stack ; restore ACC from user defined memory
clr ADF ; clear ADC interrupt flag
reti
Note: To power off the ADC, it is necessary to set ADOFF as “1”.
Rev. 1.40
112
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Digital to Analog Converter – DAC
The device includes a 16-bit Digital to Analog Converter function. This function allows digital data
contained in the device to generate audio signals.
DAC Operation
The voice data must be written into registers DAL and DAH. The audio outputs will be written into
the higher nibble of DAL and the whole byte of DAH, and the DAL3~DAL0 is unimplemented
and always read as “0H”. There are 8 scales of volume controllable level that are provided for the
voltage type DAC output. The programmer can change the volume by only writing the volume
control data to the higher-nibble of the VOL, and the lower-nibble of VOL is always read as “0H”.
The voice control bit DACEN in CTRL2 controls DAC circuit enable/disable. If the DAC circuit
is not enabled, any DAH/DAL output is in valid. Writing a “1” to DACEN bit is to enable DAC
circuit, and writing a “0” to DACEN bit is to disable DAC circuit.
CTRL2 Register
Bit
7
6
Name
DACEN
CPDEN
5
4
3
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
CPF
—
R/W
R
—
0
0
—
INT1ES1 INT1ES0 INT0ES1 INT0ES0
Bit 7
DACEN: DAC disable/enable control
0: DAC disable 1: DAC enable
The DAC circuit is disabled when system enters the HALT mode.
Bit 6~0
Described elsewhere
DAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
DA3
DA2
DA1
DA0
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
POR
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
DAH Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
DA11
DA10
DA9
DA8
DA7
DA6
DA5
DA4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
113
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
VOL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
VOL3
VOL2
VOL1
VOL0
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
POR
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
Bit 7~5
VOL3~VOL1: Volume control
000: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11~DA3
001: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11~DA2
010: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11~DA1
011: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11~DA0
100: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11,DA11,DA11~DA0,0
101: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11,DA11~DA0,0,0
110: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11,DA11~DA0,0,0,0
111: 16-bit DAC D[15:0]=DA11~DA0,0,0,0,0
Bit 4
VOL0: unused bit, read/writeable
The bit can be used as normal register bit.
Bit 3~0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Serial Interface – SPI0, SPI1
The device contains two identical SPI interfaces, known as SPI0 and SPI1. The SPI interface is often
used to communicate with external peripheral devices such as sensors, Flash or EEPROM memory
devices etc. Originally developed by Motorola, the four line SPI interface is a synchronous serial
data interface that has a relatively simple communication protocol simplifying the programming
requirements when communicating with external hardware devices.
The communication is full duplex and operates as a slave/master type, where the device can be
either master or slave. Although the SPI interface specification can control multiple slave devices
from a single master, but this device provides only one SnCS pin. If the master needs to control
multiple slave devices from a single master, the master can use an I/O pin to select the slave devices.
SPI Interface Operation
The SPI interface is a full duplex synchronous serial data link. It is a four line interface with pin
names SnDI, SnDO, SnCK and SnCS. Pins SnDI and SnDO are the Serial Data Input and Serial
Data Output lines, SnCK is the Serial Clock line and SnCS is the Slave Select line. As the SPI
interface pins are pin-shared with normal I/O pins, the SPI interface must first be enabled by setting
the correct bits in the SPInC0 and SPInC1 registers. Communication between devices connected
to the SPI interface is carried out in a slave/master mode with all data transfer initiations being
implemented by the master. The Master also controls the clock signal. As the device only contains a
single SnCS pin only one slave device can be utilized. The SnCS pin is controlled by software.
SPI Master/Slave Connection
Rev. 1.40
114
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
The SPI function in this device offers the following features:
• Full duplex synchronous data transfer Both Master and Slave modes
• LSB first or MSB first data transmission modes
• Transmission complete flag
• Rising or falling active clock edge
• Support IDLE mode, the SPI module can operate after halt instruction is executed
The status of the SPI interface pins is determined by a number of factors such as whether the device
is in the master or slave mode and upon the condition of certain control bits such as CSENn and
SPInEN.
There are several configuration options associated with the SPI interface. They are configuration
options determine if the CSENn and WCOLn functions are to be used.
Configuration Option
Function
CSENn Function
enable/disable
WCOLn Function
enable/disable
SPI Interface Configuration Options
SPI Control Register
SPI0C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SPI02
SPI01
SPI00
—
—
—
SPI0EN
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
—
POR
1
1
1
—
—
—
0
—
Bit 7~5
Rev. 1.40
SPI02~SPI00: SPI0 Operating Mode Control
000: SPI0 master mode; SPI0 clock is fSYS/4
001: SPI0 master mode; SPI0 clock is fSYS/16
010: SPI0 master mode; SPI0 clock is fSYS/64
011: SPI0 master mode; SPI0 clock is fSUB
100: SPI0 master mode; SPI0 clock is TM0 CCRP match frequency/4
101: SPI0 slave mode
110: Unused mode
111: Unused mode
These bits setup the overall operating mode of the SPI0 function. As well as selecting
if the SPI0 function, they are used to control the SPI0 Master/Slave selection and the
SPI0 Master clock frequency. The SPI0 clock is a function of the system clock but can
also be chosen to be sourced from the TM0. If the SPI0 Slave Mode is selected then
the clock will be supplied by an external Master device.
Bit 4~2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1 SPI0EN: SPI0 Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
The bit is the overall on/off control for the SPI0 interface. When the SPI0EN bit is
cleared to zero to disable the SPI0 interface, the S0DI, S0DO, S0CK and S0CS lines
will be in a floating condition and the SPI0 operating current will be reduced to a
minimum value. When the bit is high the SPI0 interface is enabled.
Bit 0 Unimplemented, read as "0"
115
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SPI0C1 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
CKPOLB0
CKEG0
MLS0
CSEN0
WCOL0
TRF0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6 Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5 CKPOLB0: Determines the base condition of the SPI0 clock line
0: the S0CK line will be high when the clock is inactive
1: the S0CK line will be low when the clock is inactive
The CKPOLB0 bit determines the base condition of the clock line, if the bit is high
then the S0CK line will be low when the clock is inactive. When the CKPOLB0 bit is
low then the S0CK line will be high when the clock is inactive.
Bit 4 CKEG0: Determines SPI0 S0CK active clock edge type
CKPOLB0=0
0: S0CK is high base level and data capture at S0CK rising edge
1: S0CK is high base level and data capture at S0CK falling edge
CKPOLB0=1
0: S0CK is low base level and data capture at S0CK falling edge
1: S0CK is low base level and data capture at S0CK rising edge
The CKEG0 and CKPOLB0 bits are used to setup the way that the clock signal
outputs and inputs data on the SPI0 bus. These two bits must be configured before
data transfer is executed otherwise an erroneous clock edge may be generated. The
CKPOLB0 bit determines the base condition of the clock line, if the bit is high then
the S0CK line will be low when the clock is inactive.
When the CKPOLB0 bit is low then the S0CK line will be high when the clock is
inactive. The CKEG0 bit determines active clock edge type which depends upon the
condition of CKPOLB0.
Bit 3 MLS0: SPI0 Data shift order
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
This is the data shift select bit and is used to select how the data is transferred, either
MSB or LSB first. Setting the bit high will select MSB first and low for LSB first.
Bit 2
CSEN0: SPI0 S0CS pin Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
The CSEN0 bit is used as an enable/disable for the S0CS pin. If this bit is low then
the S0CS pin will be disabled and placed into a floating condition. If the bit is high the
S0CS pin will be enabled and used as a select pin. Note that using the CSEN0 bit can
be disabled or enabled via configuration option.
Bit 1 WCOL0: SPI0 Write Collision flag
0: No collision
1: Collision
The WCOL0 flag is used to detect if a data collision has occurred. If this bit is high it
means that data has been attempted to be written to the SPI0D register during a data
transfer operation. This writing operation will be ignored if data is being transferred.
The bit can be cleared by the application program. Note that using the WCOL0 bit can
be disabled or enabled via configuration option.
Bit 0 TRF0: SPI0 Transmit/Receive Complete flag
0: Data is being transferred
1: SPI0 data transmission is completed
The TRF0 bit is the Transmit/Receive Complete flag and is set “1” automatically
when an SPI0 data transmission is completed, but must set to “0” by the application
program. It can be used to generate an interrupt.
116
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SPI0D Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
"x" unknown
Bit 7~0 D7~D0: SPI0 Serial bus data register
SPI1C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SPI12
SPI11
SPI10
—
—
—
SPI1EN
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
—
POR
1
1
1
—
—
—
0
—
Bit 7~5 Rev. 1.40
SPI12~SPI10: SPI1 Operating Mode Control
000: SPI1 master mode; SPI1 clock is fSYS/4
001: SPI1 master mode; SPI1 clock is fSYS/16
010: SPI1 master mode; SPI1 clock is fSYS/64
011: SPI1 master mode; SPI1 clock is fSUB
100: SPI1 master mode; SPI1 clock is TM0 CCRP match frequency/4
101: SPI1 slave mode
110: Unused mode
111: Unused mode
These bits setup the overall operating mode of the SPI1 function. As well as selecting
if the SPI1 function, they are used to control the SPI1 Master/Slave selection and the
SPI1 Master clock frequency. The SPI1 clock is a function of the system clock but can
also be chosen to be sourced from the fSUB and the TM0. If the SPI1 Slave Mode is
selected then the clock will be supplied by an external Master device.
Bit 4~2 Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1 SPI1EN: SPI1 Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
The bit is the overall on/off control for the SPI1 interface. When the SPI1EN bit is
cleared to zero to disable the SPI1 interface, the S1DI, S1DO, S1CK and S1CS lines
will be in a floating condition and the SPI1 operating current will be reduced to a
minimum value. When the bit is high the SPI1 interface is enabled.
Bit 0 Unimplemented, read as "0"
117
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SPI1C1 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
CKPOLB1
CKEG1
MLS1
CSEN1
WCOL1
TRF1
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5 CKPOLB1: Determines the base condition of the SPI1 clock line
0: the S1CK line will be high when the clock is inactive
1: the S1CK line will be low when the clock is inactive
The CKPOLB1 bit determines the base condition of the clock line, if the bit is high
then the S1CK line will be low when the clock is inactive. When the CKPOLB1 bit is
low then the S1CK line will be high when the clock is inactive.
Bit 4 CKEG1: Determines SPI1 S1CK active clock edge type CKPOLB1=0
0: S1CK is high base level and data capture at S1CK rising edge
1: S1CK is high base level and data capture at S1CK falling edge
CKPOLB1=1
0: S1CK is low base level and data capture at S1CK falling edge
1: S1CK is low base level and data capture at S1CK rising edge
The CKEG1 and CKPOLB1 bits are used to setup the way that the clock signal
outputs and inputs data on the SPI1 bus. These two bits must be configured before
data transfer is executed otherwise an erroneous clock edge may be generated. The
CKPOLB1 bit determines the base condition of the clock line, if the bit is high then
the S1CK line will be low when the clock is inactive.
When the CKPOLB1 bit is low then the S1CK line will be high when the clock is
inactive. The CKEG1 bit determines active clock edge type which depends upon the
condition of CKPOLB1.
Bit 3 MLS1: SPI1 Data shift order
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
This is the data shift select bit and is used to select how the data is transferred, either
MSB or LSB first. Setting the bit high will select MSB first and low for LSB first.
Bit 2 CSEN1: SPI1 S1CS pin Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
The CSEN1 bit is used as an enable/disable for the S1CS pin. If this bit is low then
the S1CS pin will be disabled and placed into a floating condition. If the bit is high the
S1CS pin will be enabled and used as a select pin. Note that using the CSEN1 bit can
be disabled or enabled via configuration option.
Bit 1 WCOL1: SPI1 Write Collision flag
0: No collision
1: Collision
The WCOL1 flag is used to detect if a data collision has occurred. If this bit is high it
means that data has been attempted to be written to the SPI1D register during a data
transfer operation. This writing operation will be ignored if data is being transferred.
The bit can be cleared by the application program. Note that using the WCOL1 bit can
be disabled or enabled via configuration option.
Bit 0 TRF1: SPI1 Transmit/Receive Complete flag
0: Data is being transferred
1: SPI1 data transmission is completed
The TRF1 bit is the Transmit/Receive Complete flag and is set “1” automatically
when an SPI1 data transmission is completed, but must set to “0” by the application
program. It can be used to generate an interrupt.
118
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SPI1D Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
"x" unknown
D7~D0: SPI1 Serial bus data register
Bit 7~0
SPI Communication
After the SPI interface is enabled by setting the SPInEN bit high, then in the Master Mode, when
data is written to the SPInD register, transmission/reception will begin simultaneously. When the
data transfer is complete, the TRFn flag will be set automatically, but must be cleared using the
application program. In the Slave Mode, when the clock signal from the master has been received,
any data in the SPInD register will be transmitted and any data on the SnDI pin will be shifted into
the SPInD register. The master should output an SnCS signal to enable the slave device before a
clock signal is provided. The slave data to be transferred should be well prepared at the appropriate
moment relative to the SnCS signal depending upon the configurations of the CKPOLBn bit and
CKEGn bit. The accompanying timing diagram shows the relationship between the slave data and
SnCS signal for various configurations of the CKPOLBn and CKEGn bits. The SPI will continue to
function even in the IDLE Mode.
           ­  €
 €  ­
  
  
  
           ­  €
 €  ­
  
  
  
   ‚ ƒ 
SPIn Master Mode Timing (n=0 or 1)
        ­    SPIn Slave Mode Timing – CKEGn=0 (n=0 or 1)
Rev. 1.40
119
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
                 ­€  ­ ‚  ƒ „   € … †  ‡ ˆ­ ‰ ‚ ‡ ‰ ‚ ˆ  € Š  ‹ €
‡
‡     €
… €Œ
SPIn Slave Mode Timing – CKEGn=1 (n=0 or 1)
Note: data receiving is still working when MCU enters halt mode
Interrupts
Interrupts are an important part of any microcontroller system. When an external event or an
internal function such as a Timer Module or an A/D converter requires microcontroller attention,
their corresponding interrupt will enforce a temporary suspension of the main program allowing the
microcontroller to direct attention to their respective needs. The device contains several external
interrupt and internal interrupts functions. The external interrupt is generated by the action of the
external INTn pin, while the internal interrupts are generated by various internal functions such as
TMs, Time Base, LVD, SPI, SCF, charge pump and the A/D converter.
No.
Interrupt Source
Priority
Vector
a
External interrupt 0
1
04H
b
Multi function interrupt 0
TM0 comparator A or P match interrupt
2
08H
c
Multi function interrupt 1
TM1 comparator A or P match interrupt
3
0CH
d
Multi function interrupt 2
TM2 comparator A or P match interrupt, EEPROM write interrupt
4
10H
e
A/D interrupt
5
14H
f
Multi-function 3 interrupt
(Time Base 0 Interrupt, SPI0 Interrupt, SPI1 Interrupt, INT1 Interrupt)
6
18H
g
Multi-function 4 interrupt
(Time Base 1 Interrupt, SCF, LVD Interrupt and Charge pump Interrupt)
7
1CH
Interrupt Subroutine Vector
Rev. 1.40
120
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupt Registers
Overall interrupt control, which basically means the setting of request flags when certain
microcontroller conditions occur and the setting of interrupt enable bits by the application program,
is controlled by a series of registers, located in the Special Purpose Data Memory, as shown in the
accompanying table. The first is the INTC0~INTC1 registers which setup the primary interrupts, the
second is the MFIC0~MFIC4 registers which setup the Multi-function interrupts.
Each register contains a number of enable bits to enable or disable individual registers as well as
interrupt flags to indicate the presence of an interrupt request. The naming convention of these
follows a specific pattern. First is listed an abbreviated interrupt type, then the (optional) number of
that interrupt followed by either an “E” for enable/ disable bit or “F” for request flag.
Function
Enable Bit
Request Flag
EMI
—
—
INTnE
INTnF
n=0 or 1
Global
INTn Pin
Notes
A/D Converter
ADE
ADF
—
Multi-function
MFnE
MFnF
n=0~4
Time Base
TBnE
TBnF
n=0 or 1
SPI
SPInE
SPInF
n=0 or 1
LVD
LVE
LVF
—
EEPROM
DEE
DEF
—
SCF interrupt
SCFE
SCFF
—
Charge pump interrupt
CHPE
—
—
TM
TnPE
TnPF
n=0~3
TnAE
TnAF
n=0~3
Interrupt Register Bit Naming Conventions
INTC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Name
—
MF1F
MF0F
INT0F
MF1E
MF0E
INT0E
EMI
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.40
0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
MF1F: Multi-function Interrupt 1 Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
MF0F: Multi-function Interrupt 0 Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
INT0F: INT0 Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
MF1E: Multi-function 1 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MF0E: Multi-function 0 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
INT0E: INT0 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
EMI: Global Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
121
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
MF4F
MF3F
ADF
MF2F
MF4E
MF3E
ADE
MF2E
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
MF4F: Multi-function Interrupt 4 Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
MF3F: Multi-function Interrupt 3 Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
ADF: A/D Converter Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
MF2F: Multi-function Interrupt 2 Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
MF4E: Multi-function 4 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MF3E: Multi-function 3 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
ADE: A/D Converter Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MF2E: Multi-function 2 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFIC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
DEF
T0AF
T0PF
—
DEE
T0AE
T0PE
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 6
DEF: Data EEPROM interrupt request flag
0: No request 1: Interrupt request
T0AF: TM0 Comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
T0PF: TM0 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Unimplemented, read as “0”
DEE: Data EEPROM interrupt control
0: Disable 1: Enable
T0AE: TM0 Comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
T0PE: TM0 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.40
122
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
MFIC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
T1AF
T1PF
—
—
T1AE
T1PE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5
T1AF: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4
T1PF: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3~2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1
T1AE: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0
T1PE: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFIC2 Register
Bit
Rev. 1.40
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
T2AF
T2PF
—
—
T2AE
T2PE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5
T2AF: TM2 Comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4
T2PF: TM2 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3~2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1
T2AE: TM2 Comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0
T2PE: TM2 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
123
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
MFIC3 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT1F
SPI1F
SPI0F
TB0F
INT1E
SPI1E
SPI0E
TB0E
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
INT1F: INT1 Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
SPI1F: SPI1 Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
SPI0F: SPI0 Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
TB0F: Time Base 0 Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
INT0E: INT1 Interrupt Control quest
0: Disable
1: Enable
SPI1E: SPI1 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
SPI0E: SPI0 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
TB0E: Time Base 0 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFIC4 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
LVF
TB1F
—
SCFF
LVE
TB1E
CHPE
SCFE
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
—
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.40
LVF: LVD Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
TB1F: Time Base 1 Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
This bit forbids writing.
SCFF: SCF Interrupt Request Flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
LVE: LVD Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
TB1E: Time Base 1 Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
CHPE: Charge pump Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
SCFE: SCF Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
124
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupt Operation
When the conditions for an interrupt event occur, such as a TM Comparator P, Comparator A match
or A/D conversion completion etc, the relevant interrupt request flag will be set. Whether the request
flag actually generates a program jump to the relevant interrupt vector is determined by the condition
of the interrupt enable bit. If the enable bit is set high then the program will jump to its relevant
vector, if the enable bit is zero then although the interrupt request flag is set an actual interrupt will
not be generated and the program will not jump to the relevant interrupt vector. The global interrupt
enable bit, if cleared to zero, will disable all interrupts.
When an interrupt is generated, the Program Counter, which stores the address of the next instruction
to be executed, will be transferred onto the stack. The Program Counter will then be loaded with a
new address which will be the value of the corresponding interrupt vector. The microcontroller will
then fetch its next instruction from this interrupt vector. The instruction at this vector will usually
be a “JMP” which will jump to another section of program which is known as the interrupt service
routine. Here is located the code to control the appropriate interrupt. The interrupt service routine
must be terminated with a “RETI”, which retrieves the original Program Counter address from
the stack and allows the microcontroller to continue with normal execution at the point where the
interrupt occurred.
The various interrupt enable bits, together with their associated request flags, are shown in the
Accompanying diagrams with their order of priority. Some interrupt sources have their own
individual vector while others share the same multi-function interrupt vector. Once an interrupt
subroutine is serviced, all the other interrupts will be blocked, as the global interrupt enable bit,
EMI bit will be cleared automatically. This will prevent any further interrupt nesting from occurring.
However, if other interrupt requests occur during this interval, although the interrupt will not be
immediately serviced, the request flag will still be recorded.
If an interrupt requires immediate servicing while the program is already in another interrupt service
routine, the EMI bit should be set after entering the routine, to allow interrupt nesting. If the stack
is full, the interrupt request will not be acknowledged, even if the related interrupt is enabled, until
the Stack Pointer is decremented. If immediate service is desired, the stack must be prevented from
becoming full. In case of simultaneous requests, the accompanying diagram shows the priority that
is applied. All of the interrupt request flags when set will wake-up the device if it is in SLEEP or
IDLE Mode, however to prevent a wake-up from occurring the corresponding flag should be set
before the device is in SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
Rev. 1.40
125
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
EMI auto disa�led in I�R
Legend
xxF Request Flag – no auto �eset in I�R
xxF Request Flag – auto �eset in I�R
xxE Ena�le Bit
Inte��u�t Request
Flags
Na�e
Ena�le
Bits
Maste�
Ena�le
Vector
INT0 Pin
INT0F
INT0E
EMI
04H
M. Funct. 0
MF0F
MF0E
EMI
08H
M. Funct. 1
MF1F
MF1E
EMI
0CH
M. Funct. �
MF�F
MF�E
EMI
10H
DEE
A/D
ADF
ADE
EMI
14H
TB0F
TB0E
M. Funct. 3
MF3F
MF3E
EMI
18H
�PI0
�PI0F
�PI0E
�PI1
�PI1F
�PI1E
INT1
INT1F
INT1E
TB1
TB1F
TB1E
M. Funct. 4
MF4F
MF4E
EMI
1CH
�CF
�CFF
�CFE
LVD
LVF
LVE
CHP
–
CHPE
Inte��u�t
Na�e
Request
Flags
Ena�le
Bits
TM0 P
T0PF
T0PE
TM0 A
T0AF
T0AE
TM1 P
T1PF
T1PE
TM1 A
T1AF
T1AE
TM� P
T�PF
T�PE
TM� A
T�AF
T�AE
EEPROM
DEF
TB0
P�io�ity
High
Low
Inte��u�ts contained within
Multi-Function Inte��u�ts
Interrupt Structure
Rev. 1.40
126
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
External Interrupt
The device contains two external interrupts, each of which is controlled by signal transitions on
the INTn pin. The INT0 interrupt is an independent interrupt, the INT1 interrupt is contained
within the Multi-function Interrupt. An external interrupt request will take place when the external
interrupt request flag, INTnF, is set, which will occur when a transition, whose type is chosen by the
edge select bits, appears on the external interrupt pin. To allow the program to branch to the INT0
interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and respective external interrupt enable
bit, INT0E, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the correct
transition type appears on the external interrupt pin, a subroutine call to the external interrupt vector,
will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the external interrupt request flag, INT0F, will be
automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts.
To allow the program to branch to the INT1 interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable
bit, EMI, respective external interrupt enable bit, INT1E, and relevant Multi-function Interrupt
enable bit must first be set. When the INT1 Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically
cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be
also automatically cleared. As the external interrupt request flag, INT1F, will not be automatically
cleared, it has to be cleared by the application program. Additionally the correct interrupt edge type
must be selected using the related register to enable the external interrupt function and to choose the
trigger edge type. As the external interrupt pin is pin-shared with I/O pin, it can only be configured
as external interrupt pin if the external interrupt enable bit in the corresponding interrupt register has
been set. The pin must also be setup as an input by setting the corresponding bit in the port control
register. Note that any pull-high resistor selections on the external interrupt pin will remain valid
even if the pin is used as an external interrupt input.
The bits in CTRL2 register is used to select the type of active edge that will trigger the external
interrupt A choice of either rising or falling or both edge types can be chosen to trigger an external
interrupt. Note that this register can also be used to disable the external interrupt function.
CTRL2 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
DACEN
CPDEN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
1
0
INT1ES1 INT1ES0 INT0ES1 INT0ES0
Bit 7~6
Described elsewhere
Bit 5~4
INT1ES1, INT1ES0: external interrupt 1 edge selection
00: disable
01: rising edge trigger
10: falling edge trigger
11: dual edge trigger
Bit 3~2
INT0ES1, INT0ES0: external interrupt 0 edge selection
00: disable
01: rising edge trigger
10: falling edge trigger
11: dual edge trigger
Bit 1~0
Described elsewhere.
127
1
0
CPF
—
R
—
0
—
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Converter Interrupt
The device contains an A/D converter which has its own independent interrupt. The A/D Converter
Interrupt is controlled by the termination of an A/D conversion process. An A/D Converter Interrupt
request will take place when the A/D Converter Interrupt request flag, ADF, is set, which occurs
when the A/D conversion process finishes. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt
vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and A/D Interrupt enable bit, ADE, must first be
set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the A/D conversion process has ended, a
subroutine call to the A/D Converter Interrupt vector, will take place. When the interrupt is serviced,
the A/D Converter Interrupt flag, ADF, will be automatically cleared. The EMI bit will also be
automatically cleared to disable other interrupts.
Multi-function Interrupt
Within this device there are five Multi-function interrupts. Unlike the other independent interrupts,
these interrupts have no independent source, but rather are formed from other existing interrupt
sources.
A Multi-function interrupt request will take place the Multi-function interrupt request flag, MFnF
is set. The Multi-function interrupt flag will be set when any of its included functions generate an
interrupt request flag. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address,
when the Multi-function interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, and either one of the interrupts
contained within each of Multi-function interrupt occurs, a subroutine call to the Multi-function
interrupt vector will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the related Multi-Function request
flag, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts.
However, it must be noted that, although the Multi-function Interrupt flags will be automatically
reset when the interrupt is serviced, the request flags from the original source of the Multifunction interrupts, namely the TM Interrupt, LVD Interrupt, EEPROM Interrupt, Time-base
Interrupt, external 1 interrupt, SPIn interrupts, SCF interrupt and Charge Pump interrupt will not be
automatically reset and must be manually reset by the application program.
Time Base Interrupt
The Time-base Interrupt, is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. The function of the
Time Base Interrupts is to provide regular time signal in the form of an internal interrupt. They
are controlled by the overflow signals from their respective timer functions. When these happens
their respective interrupt request flags, TB0F or TB1F will be set. To allow the program to branch
to their respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI , multi-function
enable bit, MFnE and Time Base enable bits, TB0E or TB1E, must first be set. When the interrupt
is enabled, the stack is not full and the Time Base overflows, a subroutine call to their respective
vector locations will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically
cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be
also automatically cleared. As the TBnF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be cleared
by the application program.
The purpose of the Time Base Interrupt is to provide an interrupt signal at fixed time periods. Their
clock sources originate from the internal clock source fTB. This fTB input clock passes through a
divider, the division ratio of which is selected by programming the appropriate bits in the TBC
register to obtain longer interrupt periods whose value ranges. The clock source that generates fTB,
which in turn controls the Time Base interrupt period, can originate from several different sources,
as shown in the System Operating Mode section.
Rev. 1.40
128
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
      Time Base Interrupt
TBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TBON
TBCK
TB11
TB10
LXTLP
TB02
TB01
TB00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
Bit 7
TBON: TB0 and TB1 Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 6
TBCK: Select fTB Clock
0: fTBC
1: fSYS/4
Bit 5~4
TB11, TB10: Select Time Base 1 Time-out Period
00: 4096/fTB
01: 8192/fTB
10: 16384/fTB
11: 32768/fTB
Bit 3
LXTLP: LXT Low Power Control
0: Disable (LXT quick start-up)
1: Enable (LXT slow start-up)
Bit 2~0
TB02~TB00: Select Time Base 0 Time-out Period
000: 256/fTB
001: 512/fTB
010: 1024/fTB
011: 2048/fTB
100: 4096/fTB
101: 8192/fTB
110: 16384/fTB
111: 32768/fTB
SPI Interrupts
The SPI1 and SPI0 Interrupts, are contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. When the SPI
data transmit has been finished, their respective interrupt request flags, SPInF will be set. To allow
the program to branch to their respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit,
EMI, multi-function enable bit, MFnE and SPI interrupt enable bits, SPInE, must first be set. When
the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the SPI transmit data finished, a subroutine call to
the respective Multi-function Interrupt vector, will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the
EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function
interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the SPInF flags will not be automatically
cleared, they have to be cleared by the application program.
Rev. 1.40
129
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LVD Interrupt
The Low Voltage Detector Interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. A LVD
Interrupt request will take place when the LVD Interrupt request flag, LVF, is set, which occurs
when the Low Voltage Detector function detects a low power supply voltage. To allow the program
to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, Low Voltage
Interrupt enable bit, LVE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When
the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to
the Multi-function Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Low Voltage Interrupt is serviced, the
EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function
interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the LVF flag will not be automatically
cleared, it has to be cleared by the application program.
EEPROM Interrupt
The EEPROM interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. An EEPROM Interrupt
request will take place when the EEPROM Interrupt request flag, DEF, is set, which occurs
when an EEPROM Write cycle ends. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt
vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and EEPROM Interrupt enable bit, DEE, and
associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the
stack is not full and an EEPROM Write cycle ends, a subroutine call to the respective EEPROM
Interrupt vector will take place. When the EEPROM Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be
automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request
flag will be also automatically cleared. As the DEF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be
cleared by the application program.
TM Interrupts
The Compact and Standard Type TMs have two interrupts each. All of the TM interrupts are
contained within the Multi-function Interrupts. For each of the Compact and Standard Type TMs
there are two interrupt request flags TnPF and TnAF and two enable bits TnPE and TnAE. A TM
interrupt request will take place when any of the TM request flags are set, a situation which occurs
when a TM comparator P or A match situation happens.
To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable
bit, EMI, respective TM Interrupt enable bit, and relevant Multi-function Interrupt enable bit, MFnE,
must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a TM comparator match
situation occurs, a subroutine call to the relevant Multi-function Interrupt vector locations, will take
place. When the TM interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts, however only the related MFnF flag will be automatically cleared. As the TM interrupt
request flags will not be automatically cleared, they have to be cleared by the application program.
SCF Interrupt
The SCF interrupt, is contained within the Multi-function interrupt. When SCF PGA output a rising
edge, its interrupt request flag, SCFF will be set. To allow the program to branch to their respective
interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, multi-function enable bit, MFnE
and SCF interrupt enable bit, SCFE, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not
full and SCF PGA output a rising edge, a subroutine call to the respective Multi-function Interrupt
vector, will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared
to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be also
automatically cleared. As the SCFF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be cleared by the
application program.
Rev. 1.40
130
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Charge Pump Interrupt
The charge pump Interrupt, is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. To allow the program
to branch to their respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, multifunction enable bit, MFnE and charge pump interrupt enable bit, CHPE, must first be set. When the
interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the input voltage of charge pump is greater than 3.8V, a
subroutine call to the respective Multi-function Interrupt vector, will take place. When the interrupt
is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the
Multi-function interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared.
Interrupt Wake-up Function
Each of the interrupt functions has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode. A wake-up is generated when an interrupt request flag changes from low to
high and is independent of whether the interrupt is enabled or not. Therefore, even though the device
is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode and its system oscillator stopped, situations such as external edge
transitions on the external interrupt pins, a low power supply voltage or comparator input change
may cause their respective interrupt flag to be set high and consequently generate an interrupt. Care
must therefore be taken if spurious wake-up situations are to be avoided. If an interrupt wake-up
function is to be disabled then the corresponding interrupt request flag should be set high before the
device enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode. The interrupt enable bits have no effect on the interrupt
wake-up function.
Programming Considerations
By disabling the relevant interrupt enable bits, a requested interrupt can be prevented from being
serviced, however, once an interrupt request flag is set, it will remain in this condition in the
interrupt register until the corresponding interrupt is serviced or until the request flag is cleared by
the application program.
Where a certain interrupt is contained within a Multi-function interrupt, then when the interrupt
service routine is executed, as only the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MFnF, will be
automatically cleared, the individual request flag for the function needs to be cleared by the
application program.
It is recommended that programs do not use the “CALL” instruction within the interrupt service
subroutine. Interrupts often occur in an unpredictable manner or need to be serviced immediately.
If only one stack is left and the interrupt is not well controlled, the original control sequence will be
damaged once a CALL subroutine is executed in the interrupt subroutine.
Every interrupt has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when it is in SLEEP or IDLE
Mode, the wake up being generated when the interrupt request flag changes from low to high. If it is
required to prevent a certain interrupt from waking up the microcontroller then its respective request
flag should be first set high before enter SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
As only the Program Counter is pushed onto the stack, then when the interrupt is serviced, if the
contents of the accumulator, status register or other registers are altered by the interrupt service
program, their contents should be saved to the memory at the beginning of the interrupt service
routine.
To return from an interrupt subroutine, either a RET or RETI instruction may be executed. The RETI
instruction in addition to executing a return to the main program also automatically sets the EMI
bit high to allow further interrupts. The RET instruction however only executes a return to the main
program leaving the EMI bit in its present zero state and therefore disabling the execution of further
interrupts.
Rev. 1.40
131
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Low Voltage Detector – LVD
Each device has a Low Voltage Detector function, also known as LVD. This enabled the device to
monitor the power supply voltage, VDD, and provide a warning signal should it fall below a certain
level. This function may be especially useful in battery applications where the supply voltage will
gradually reduce as the battery ages, as it allows an early warning battery low signal to be generated.
The Low Voltage Detector also has the capability of generating an interrupt signal.
LVD Register
The Low Voltage Detector function is controlled using a single register with the name LVDC. Three
bits in this register, VLVD2~VLVD0, are used to select one of eight fixed voltages below which a
low voltage conditionwill be determined. A low voltage condition is indicatedwhen the LVDO bit is
set. If the LVDO bit is low, this indicates that the VDD voltage is above the preset low voltage value.
The LVDEN bit is used to control the overall on/off function of the low voltage detector. Setting the
bit high will enable the low voltage detector. Clearing the bit to zero will switch off the internal low
voltage detector circuits. As the low voltage detector will consume a certain amount of power, it may
be desirable to switch off the circuit when not in use, an important consideration in power sensitive
battery powered applications.
LVDC Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
LVDO
LVDEN
—
VLVD2
VLVD1
VLVD0
R/W
—
—
R
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5
LVDO: LVD Output Flag
0: No Low Voltage Detect
1: Low Voltage Detect
Bit 4
LVDEN: Low Voltage Detector Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2~0
VLVD2~VLVD0: Select LVD Voltage
000: 2.0V
001: 2.2V
010: 2.4V
011: 2.7V
100: 3.0V
101: 3.3V
110: 3.6V
111: 4.0V
132
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector function operates by comparing the power supply voltage, VDD, with a
pre-specified voltage level stored in the LVDC register. This has a range of between 2.0V and 4.0V.
When the power supply voltage, VDD, falls below this pre-determined value, the LVDO bit will be
set high indicating a low power supply voltage condition. The Low Voltage Detector function is
supplied by a reference voltagewhich will be automatically enabled.When the device is powered
down the low voltage detector will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. After enabling the Low
Voltage Detector, a time delay tLVDS should be allowed for the circuitry to stabilise before reading the
LVDO bit. Note also that as the VDD voltage may rise and fall rather slowly, at the voltage nears that
of VLVD, there may be multiple bit LVDO transitions.
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector also has its own interrupt which is contained within one of the Multifunction interrupts, providing an alternative means of low voltage detection, in addition to polling
the LVDO bit. The interrupt will only be generated after a delay of tLVD after the LVDO bit has been
set high by a low voltage condition. When the device is powered down the Low Voltage Detector
will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. In this case, the LVF interrupt request flag will be set,
causing an interrupt to be generated if VDD falls below the preset LVD voltage. This will cause the
device to wake-up from the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, however if the Low Voltage Detector wake up
function is not required then the LVF flag should be first set high before the device enters the SLEEP
or IDLE Mode.
When LVD function is enabled, it is recommenced to clear LVD flag first, and then enables interrupt
function to avoid mistake action.
Rev. 1.40
133
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programmable Gain Amplifier and Switched Capacitor Filter
The device includes several Programmable Gain Amplifiers, PGAs, as well as a Switched Capacitor
Filter, SCF, bandpass filter for sensor signal processing.
�VIP
�VIN
V+
V-
To ADC AN6
VPGAO1
PGA1
PGA�
�CF
PGA
�CFR
�LPF
R1
R�
VPGAO�
To ADC AN4
V�CF
To ADC AN�
�CFC
C1
C3
C�
PGA Block Diagram
PGA Operation
The overall enable/disable function of the PGA is controlled by the PGAEN bit in the PGAC0
register. When this bit is low the PGA circuits will be powered down, which will be an important
consideration in battery powered equipment. The PGA functions include two PGAs, PGA1 and
PGA2 as well as a combined PGA and switched capacitor filter. Note: When using the PGA function,
the user must wait for about 15ms after enabling the Regulator. Then setup the PGA options and
wait for about 400ms, before starting the ADC conversion. In this way the correct ADC conversion
value can be obtained.
PGA1
The PGA1 input voltage range is from -20mV to 100mV. The gain of PGA1 is subdivided into two
stages. The first stage, known as G11, has a value of 8, 16, 32 or 64 and is controlled by the PGAC0
register. The second stage, known as G12, and has a value of (32~63)/32 and is controlled by the
PGAC1 register. The PGA1 Offset Voltage, VOF1, can be (PGAVREF[4:0]/32)×VOREG, giving
a range of 32 discrete values, and is controlled by the PGAC0 register. The PGA1 output voltage,
VPGAO1, is given by the following formula:
VPGAO1 = (V+ - V-) × G11 × G12 + VOF1
PGA2
The gain of PGA2 is fixed at a value of 2. The PGA2 offset voltage, VOF2, is given by the following formula:
VOF2 = VREG(3.3V) × (0~255)/256
The PGA2 output voltage, VPGA02, is given by the following formula:
VPGAO2 = (VPGAO1 × 2) – VOF2
It is the VPGA02 signal that is provided to the A/D converter for blood pressure measuring.
Rev. 1.40
134
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Switched Capacitor Filter
The device includes a band pass switch capacitor filter. The SCF PGA input voltage range, Vin, is
30µV~150µV. In the SCF the Low Pass Filter cut off frequency can be selected to be: 9Hz, 10Hz,
11Hz, 12Hz, selected using the SCFC0 register. The high pass filter cut off frequency is fixed at 0.7Hz.
The SCF also includes a PGA function whose gain can be setup using the SCFC0 register to have a
value between 56 and 308, selected in 64 discrete stages, using bits in the SCFC0 register. The SCF
gain is given by the following formula:
SCF Gain = 56 + 4 × SCFA[5:0]
The SCF requires a clock with a frequency of about 488Hz. The SCF is sourced from the system
clock and subdivided using bits in the SCFC1 and SFCKD registers. The SCF clock is given by the
following formula:
SCF clock = fSCF / (SCFCKD + 1)
where SCFCKD represent the decimal value of the 8 bits in the SCFCKD register, and where fSCF
= fSYS/8, fSYS/16, fSYS/32, fSYS/64, fSYS/128, fSYS/256, fSYS/512, fSYS/1024 selected using bits in the
SCFC1 register.
SCF Signal Automatic A/D Conversion
The SCF is connected to the A/D converter and can be setup to execute automatic A/D conversion
for the SCF output signal. When the auto measure A/D Converter Enable/Disable bit, SCFADC, is
high, then the A/D converter will automatically select the SCF output as its input channel and will
override any application program A/D channel selection configuration. Here, an A/D conversion
process, initiated by the application program will still be effective. If an A/D conversion process,
initiated by either the SCF or application program, is still in progress, and another A/D initiation
request (i.e. START) occurs, then this last A/D request will always have priority.
The accompanying diagram shows the relationship between the automatic A/D conversion process
and the SCF clock.
SCF clock (488Hz)
SCF auto trigger ADC
start or SCFADSF flag
Interval when SCF output is available for A/D conversion
Here the SCF output is automatically converted by
the A/D converter and generates an SCF interrupt.
Automatic SCF signal A/D converter timing
Rev. 1.40
135
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
PGA Control Register
PGAC0 Register
Bit
7
6
Name
PGAEN
PGAA01
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGAA00 PGAVREF4 PGAVREF3 PGAVREF2 PGAVREF1 PGAVREF0
Bit 7
PGAEN: enable/disable
0: disable – all PGA and SCF circuits powered down 1: enable
Bit 6~5
PGAA01, PGAA00: PGA1 first stage gain selection 00: 8
01: 16
10: 32
11: 64
Bit 4~0
PGAVREF4~PGAVREF0: PGA1 Offset Voltage selection PGA1 Offset Voltage = ([PGAVREF4:0] / 32) * VOREG
PGAC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CPEN
BIPGA1
BIPGA0
PGAA14
PGAA13
PGAA12
PGAA11
PGAA10
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
CPEN: PGA1’s chopper enabled/disabled control
0: disabled
1: enabled
When chopper is enabled, the system will supply a 12kHz to PAG1 for chopper
operation.
Bit 6~5
BIPGA1, BIPGA0: low-noise OPA bias current control
Bit 4~0
PGAA14~PGAA10: PGA1 second stage gain selection
Gain range: 0 ~ 31
Gain = (1 + [PGAA14:PAGA10] / 32)
PGAC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
D7~D0: PAG2 Offset Voltage selection
PGA2 Offset Voltage = (3.3V x [PGAC2[7:0] / 256)
136
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SCFC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SCFLF1
SCFLF0
SCFA5
SCFA4
SCFA3
SCFA2
SCFA1
SCFA0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
SCFLF1~SCFLF0: SCF Low Pass Filter cutoff frequency selection
Band-pass filter – 3dB selection:
00: 9Hz
01: 10Hz
10: 11Hz
11: 12Hz
Bit 5~0
SCFA5~SCFA0: SCF Gain selection
Gain range: 0~63
Gain = 56 + 4 x SCFA[5:0]
SCFC1 Register
Bit
7
6
Name
—
SCFADSF
5
R/W
—
R
R/W
POR
—
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
SCFCKP1
SCFCKP0
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
0
0
0
—
—
SCFADC SCFCKP2
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 6
SCFADSF: Enable A/D Converter to measure SCF output signal
0: Disable A/D Converter to measure SCF output signal
1: Enable A/D Converter to measure SCF output signal
Bit 5
SCFADC: A/D Converter Enable/Disable auto measure SCF output signal
0: Disable
1: Enable – A/D converter will automatically initiate an SCF signal A/D conversion
Bit 4~2
SCFCKP2~SCFCKP0: SCF clock prescaler
000: fSYS/8
001: fSYS/16
010: fSYS/32
011: fSYS/64
100: fSYS/128
101: fSYS/256
110: fSYS/512
111: fSYS/1024
Bit 1~0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
SCFCKD Register
Bit
Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SCFCKD7 SCFCKD6 SCFCKD5 SCFCKD4 SCFCKD3 SCFCKD2 SCFCKD1 SCFCKD0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.40
7
SCFCKD7~SCFCKD0: The SCF circuit clock divider.
These 8 bits can form the clock divided by 1-256. Following the below equation: SCF clock = fSCF / (SCFCKD+1)
137
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Sensor Constant Current Generator Circuit
The device includes a constant current generator for driving the pressure bridge sensor. This is
formed using a programmable voltage reference and operational amplifier.
Constant Current Generator Operation
The constant current generator must be first enabled by setting the CCVREFEN bit in the
CCVREFC register high. If cleared to zero then the circuits will be powered down, which will be
an important consideration in battery powered equipment. The VCCREF circuit output voltage can
be selected to be between 0.2V~0.95V, in intervals of 0.05V, providing 16 selections using bits in
the CCVREFC register. This voltage is available on pin CCVREF to which a capacitor should be
connected for stabilisation purposes. This voltage is provided to the positive input of an internal
operational amplifier. By connecting an external resistor to the negative operational amplifier input,
a constant current can be setup.
MCU
CCVREF
VCCREF
0.�V~0.9�V
+
-
CCVIN
OPA
CCVIP
Constant Current Generator Block Diagram
Rev. 1.40
138
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pressure Sensor Constant Current Control Register
CCVREFC Register
Bit
Name
Rev. 1.40
7
6
CCVREFEN BATEN
5
4
3
2
—
—
CCVREF3
CCVREF2
1
0
CCVREF1 CCVREF0
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
CCVREFEN: Sensor fixed current circuit enable/disable
0: disable – constant current circuit powered down
1: enable
Bit 6
BATEN: Battery voltage sense circuit enable/disable 0: disable – battery detect circuit powered down 1: enable
Bit 5~4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3~0
CCVREF3~CCVREF0: Sensor constant current generator voltage reference selection
0000: 0.2V
0001: 0.25V
0010: 0.3V
0011: 0.35V
0100: 0.4V
0101: 0.45V
0110: 0.5V
0111: 0.55V
1000: 0.6V
1001: 0.65V
1010: 0.7V
1011: 0.75V
1100: 0.8V
1101: 0.85V
1110: 0.9V
1111: 0.95V
139
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Charge Pump and Voltage Regulator
There device includes a charge pump and one voltage regulator for generation of a constant 3.3V voltage.
Operation
The charge pump can be enabled or disabled depending on the application. The charge pump acts
as a voltage doubler with VDD as its input. The output voltage of charge pump will therefore be
VDD×2. This voltage is provided to the regulator input which will in turn generate a stable 3.3V
voltage, which can be used by the A/D converter or as an external sensor excitation voltage or other
applications. It is necessary that the charge pump provides a minimum output voltage of greater than
3.6V to provide the regulator with its minimum operating voltage for proper 3.3V voltage generation.
The block diagram of these two functions is shown below:
VOCHP
CHPC� CHPC1
VDDCH
VDDCH
Cha�ge Pu��
V��CH
(Voltage Dou�le�)
f�
VOREG
VDDCH x �
3.3V
Regulato�
(3.3V)
ADC
OPA
WDT
PGA
�CF
Divide�
CHPCKD
CHPEN
REGCEN
The charge pump application circuit is shown below:
CHPC1
C1
PC6/CHPC�
VOCHP
HT45F3W
C�
VOREG/AVDD
C3
V��/AV��/V��CH
Charge pump Circuit
Note: 1. C1 uses 10μF MLCC capacitor.
2. C2 and C3 use 1μF~10μF Electrolytic capacitor
3. When entering the HALT mode, the hardware will turn off the Charge pump automatically to
prevent the charge pump output being in an unknown state. During this time the LCD cannot be
used.
Rev. 1.40
140
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
A single register, CHPRC, controls overall operation of the charge pump and regulator, controlling
functions such as the charge pump on/off, regulator on/off and determines the clock divider value to
generate the charge pump clock frequency.
The REGCEN bit in the CHPRC register is the Regulator/Charge-Pump module enable/disable
control bit. If this bit is disabled, then the regulator and charge pump will both be disabled to save
power. If this bit is set to “0” then the charge pump and regulator module will be powered down
irrespective of the CHPEN bit setting. If the REGCEN bit is set to “1”, the regulator will be enabled.
If the CHPEN is enabled, the charge pump will be active and will use VDD as its input, to generate
the double voltage output. The double voltage will be used as the regulator input. If the CHPEN bit
is set to “0”, the charge pump is disabled and the charge pump output will be equal to the charge
pump input VDD.
When using the regulator, it is necessary to take note of the VDD voltage. If the voltage is under 3.6V
then, the CHPEN bit should be set high to enable the charge pump; otherwise CHPEN should be
cleared to zero. If the charge pump is disabled and the VDD is under 3.6V, then the output voltage of
the regulator will not be guaranteed.
CHPRC Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
CHPCKD4 CHPCKD3 CHPCKD2 CHPCKD1 CHPCKD0
2
—
1
0
CHPEN REGCEN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
0
Bit 7~3
CHPCKD4~CHPCKD0: Charge pump clock divider
Clock division select, range of 1-32. Charge Pump clock = (fSYS/16) / (CHPCKD+1)
Charge Pump clock should be selected to be as near 20kHz as possible.
Bit 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1
CHPEN: Charge Pump Enable/Disable Control
0: disable 1: enable
Bit 0
REGCEN: Regulator Enable/Disable Control
0: disable 1: enable
REGCEN CHPEN
Charge
(control (control
Pump
signal)
signal)
VOCHP
Pin
Regulator
VOREG Pin
Description
0
0
OFF
VDD
OFF
Hi-Impedance
Complete module disabled, OPA/ADC
loses power
0
1
OFF
VDD
OFF
VDD
Complete module disabled, OPA/ADC
loses power
1
0
OFF
VDD
ON
3.3V
Use when VDD is greater than 3.8V
(VDD>3.8V)
1
1
ON
2xVDD
ON
3.3V
Use when VDD is less than 3.8V
(VDD=2.2V~3.8V)
Rev. 1.40
141
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
If VDD is greater than 3.8V, the charge pump interrupt flag will be set and the device should turn off
the charge pump automatically using the application program.
The Charge Pump clock source comes from the system clock. The CHPCKD[4:0] bits are used to
set the clock divider ratio to generate the desired clock frequency to for the charge pump module.
The actual frequency is decided by the following formula:
Charge Pump Clock Frequency = (fSYS/16) / (CHPCKD+1)
It is recommended that the charge pump clock frequency kept close to 20kHz. The application
program needs to set the correct value to get the desired clock frequency. For example, for a 4MHZ
application, the CHPCKD bits should be set to 11, and for a 2MHz application, the correct value of
CHPCKD is 5.
The charge pump module contains a voltage detect circuit to detect whether the input voltage is
greater than 3.8V. The two related control bits for charge pump input voltage detector is contained
in the CTRL2 register. The CPDEN bit is used to enable or disable the input voltage detect function.
The other CPF bit, is a read only bit. CPF is a flag bit to record the current charge pump input
voltage status. If the input voltage is greater than 3.6V, the CPF will be set high, otherwise, it will
be cleared to zero. When the input voltage is over 3.6V, it is also necessary to take note that a charge
pump interrupt will be generated. Note: When entering the HALT mode, the hardware will turn
off the Charge pump automatically to prevent the charge pump output being in an unknown state.
During this time the LCD cannot be used. Note: About 15ms after enabling the regulator, a stable
output will be generated. Only after this time can the related analog circuits (ADC, OPA, WDT,
PGA, SCF) be setup and used. If the PGA has been enabled, then wait for about 400ms before
setting and operating the ADC.
CTRL2 Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
Name
DACEN
CPDEN
5
4
3
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
CPF
—
R/W
R
—
0
0
—
INT1ES1 INT1ES0 INT0ES1 INT0ES0
Bit 7
Described elsewhere
Bit 6
CPDEN: Charge pump input voltage detector circuit disable/enable control
0: disable 1: enable
If CPDEN=0, the Charge pump voltage input detector circuit is disabled, CPF will
remain at 0, and the detector circuit consumes no power.
Bit 5~2
Described elsewhere
Bit 1
CPF: Charge pump input voltage detector flag
0: Charge pump input voltage is above 3.8V
1: Charge pump input voltage is equal to or under 3.8V
When CPDEN and REGCEN are enabled, the CPF will be working.
Bit 0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
142
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LCD Driver
For large volume applications, which incorporate an LCD in their design, the use of a custom
display rather than a more expensive character based display reduces costs significantly. However,
the corresponding COM and SEG signals required, which vary in both amplitude and time, to drive
such a custom display require many special considerations for proper LCD operation to occur. This
device contains an LCD Driver function, which with its internal LCD signal generating circuitry and
various options, will automatically generate these time and amplitude varying signals to provide a
means of direct driving and easy interfacing to a range of custom LCDs.
Duty
Driver No.
1/4
24×4
1/6
22×6
1/8
20×8
Bias
Bias Type
Wave Type
1/3 or 1/4
R
A or B
LCD Display Memory
The device provides an area of embedded data memory for LCD display. This area is located from
80H to 97H of the RAM at Bank 1. Bank pointer (BP) is the switch between the RAM and the LCD
display memory. When BP.2~BP.0 is set to “001”, data written into 80H~97H will affect the LCD
display. If the BP.2~BP.0 is set to a value other than “001”, any data written into 80H~FFH is meant
to access the general purpose data memory.
The LCD display memory can be read and written to only by indirect addressing mode using MP1.
When data is written into the display data area, it is automatically read by the LCD driver which
then generates the corresponding LCD driving signals. To turn the display on or off, a “1” or a “0”
is written to the corresponding bit of the display memory, respectively. The figure illustrates the
mapping between the display memory and LCD pattern for the device.
LCD Memory Map
Rev. 1.40
143
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
LCD Control Register
Control Registers in the Data Memory, are used to control the various setup features of the LCD
Driver. Various bits in these registers control functions such as duty type, bias type, bias resistor
selection as well as overall LCD enable and disable. The LCDEN bit in the LCDCTRL register,
which provides the overall LCD enable/disable function, will only be effective when the device is
in the Normal, Slow or Idle Mode. If the device is in the Sleep Mode then the display will always
be disabled. Bits RSEL0 and RSEL1 in the LCDCTRL register select the internal bias resistors to
supply the LCD panel with the correct bias voltages. A choice to best match the LCD panel used
in the application can be selected also to minimise bias current. The TYPE bit in the same register
is used to select whether Type A or Type B LCD control signals are used. The SEGCR register is
used to determine if the output function of display pins SEG0~SEG7 are used as segment drivers or
CMOS outputs. If used as CMOS outputs then the Display Memory is used to determine the logic
level of the CMOS output pins.
LCDCTRL Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TYPE
DTYC1
DTYC0
—
BIAS0
RSEL1
RSEL0
LCDEN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
TYPE: LCD Type A or B
0: Type A
1: Type B
Bit 6~5
DTYC1, DTYC0: Define LCD Duty
0: 1/4 Duty (24×4)
1: 1/8 Duty (20×8)
2: 1/6 Duty (22×6)
3: 1/8 Duty (20×8)
Bit 4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3
BIAS0: Define LCD Bias
0: 1/3 Bias
1: 1/4 Bias
Bit 2~1
RSEL1, RSEL0: Bias resistor select
1/4 bias
00: 192kΩ– 48kΩ×4
01: 96kΩ – 24kΩ×4
10: 48kΩ – 12kΩ×4
11: 24kΩ – 6kΩ×4
1/3 bias
00: 144kΩ – 48kΩ×3
01: 72kΩ – 24kΩ×3
10: 36kΩ – 12kΩ×3
11: 18kΩ – 6kΩ×3
Bit 0
LCDEN: LCD enable/disable control
0: disable
1: enable
144
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SEGCR Register
Rev. 1.40
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SEG7C
SEG6C
SEG5C
SEG4C
SEG3C
SEG2C
SEG1C
SEG0C
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
SEG7C: Select SEG7 or PD7
0: SEG7
1: PD7
Bit 6
SEG6C: Select SEG6 or PD6
0: SEG6
1: PD6
Bit 5
SEG5C: Select SEG5 or PD5
0: SEG5
1: PD5
Bit 4
SEG4C: Select SEG4 or PD4
0: SEG4
1: PD4
Bit 3
SEG3C: Select SEG3 or PD3
0: SEG3
1: PD3
Bit 2
SEG2C: Select SEG2 or PD2
0: SEG2
1: PD2
Bit 1
SEG1C: Select SEG1 or PD1
0: SEG1
1: PD1
Bit 0
SEG0C: Select SEG0 or PD0
0: SEG0
1: PD0
145
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
VLCDC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
VLCDEN
—
—
—
VLCD3
VLCD2
VLCD1
VLCD0
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
VLCDEN: LCD power enable or disable control
0: disable – VSS connected to biasing circuits – LCD off 1: enable – VLCD connected to LCD biasing circuits
When the VLCDEN bit has been set to “1”, the regulator must be enabled by the
program simultaneously, so that the LCD can obtain its power supply.
Bit 6~4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3~0
VLCD3~VLCD0: LCD voltage select
0000: 3.0V 0001: 3.1V 0010: 3.2V 0011: 3.3V 0100: 3.4V 0101: 3.5V 0110: 3.6V 0111: 3.7V 1000: 3.8V 1001: 3.9V 1010: 4.0V 1011: 4.1V 1100: 4.2V 1101: 4.3V 1110: 4.4V 1111: 4.5V
Clock Source
The LCD clock source is the internal clock signal, fSUB, divided by 8, using an internal divider
circuit. The fSUB internal clock is supplied by either the LIRC or LXT oscillator, the choice of which
is determined by a configuration option. For proper LCD operation, this arrangement is provided to
generate an ideal LCD clock source frequency of 4kHz.
fSUB Clock Source
LCD Clock Frequency
LIRC
4kHz
LXT
4kHz
LCD Clock Source
LCD Driver Output
When the SEG7C~SEG0C bits in the SEGCR register are cleared to zero, the SEG7/PD7~SEG0/
PD0 lines will be setup as LCD driver pins to drive the LCD display, otherwise, they will have
general I/O functions. The biasing and duty of LCD are dependent upon how the related LCD
control bits are programmed. The nature of Liquid Crystal Displays require that only AC voltages
can be applied to their pixels as the application of DC voltages to LCD pixels may cause permanent
damage. For this reason the relative contrast of an LCD display is controlled by the actual RMS
voltage applied to each pixel, which is equal to the RMS value of the voltage on the COM pin minus
the voltage applied to the SEG pin. This differential RMS voltage must be greater than the LCD
saturation voltage for the pixel to be on and less than the threshold voltage for the pixel to be off.
Rev. 1.40
146
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
The requirement to limit the DC voltage to zero and to control as many pixels as possible with
a minimum number of connections, requires that both a time and amplitude signal is generated
and applied to the application LCD. These time and amplitude varying signals are automatically
generated by the LCD driver circuits in the microcontroller. What is known as the duty determines
the number of common lines used which are also known as backplanes or COMs. The duty, which
is chosen by two control bits DTYC1 and DTYC0 to have a value of 1/4, 1/6 and 1/8, and which
equates to a COM number of 4, 6 and 8, therefore defines the number of time divisions within each
LCD signal frame. Two types of signal generation are also provided, known as Type A and Type
B, the required type is selected via the TYPE bit in the LCDCTRL register. Type B offers lower
frequency signals, however lower frequencies may introduce flickering and influence display clarity.
LCD Voltage Source and Biasing
The time and amplitude varying signals generated by the LCD Driver function require the generation
of several voltage levels for their operation. The device only has R type biasing. For R type biasing
an internal LCD voltage source, VLCD is supplied to generate the internal biasing voltages. The
VLCD voltage can be selected to have a range between 3V and 4.5V, in steps of 0.1V, using the
VLCD0~VLCD3 bits in the VLCDC register. For the 1/3 bias selection, four voltage levels VSS, VA,
VB and VC are utilised. The voltage VA is equal to VLCD, VB is equal to VLCD x 2/3 while VC is equal
to VLCD x 1/3. For the 1/4 bias selection, four voltage levels VSS, VA, VB, VC and VD are utilised. The
voltage VA is equal to VLCD, VB is equal to VLCD x 3/4, VC is equal to VLCD x 1/2, while VD is equal
to VLCD x 1/4. In addition to selecting 1/3 or 1/4 bias, several values of bias resistor can be chosen
using bits in the LCDCTRL register. Different values of internal bias resistors can be selected using
the RSEL0 and RESEL1 bits in the LCDCTRL register.
This along with the value of VLCD will determine the bias current.
VA
(=VLCD)
VA
(=VLCD)
R
R
VB
(=VLCD × �/3)
VC
(=VLCD × �/4)
R
VC
(=VLCD × 1/3)
R
VB
(=VLCD × 3/4)
R
VD
(=VLCD × 1/4)
R
R
LCD On/Off
LCD On/Off
R type 1/4 Bias
R type 1/3 Bias
Bias Voltage Generation
Rev. 1.40
147
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
Certain precautions must be taken when programming the LCD. One of these is to ensure that the
Display Memory is properly initialised after the microcontroller is powered on. Like the General
Purpose Data Memory, the contents of the Display Memory are in an unknown condition after
power-on. As the contents of the Display Memory will be mapped into the actual display, it is
important to initialise this memory area into a known condition soon after applying power to obtain
a proper display pattern.
Consideration must also be given to the capacitive load of the actual LCD used in the application.
As the load presented to the microcontroller by LCD pixels can be generally modeled as mainly
capacitive in nature, it is important that this is not excessive, a point that is particularly true in the
case of the COM lines which may be connected to many LCD pixels. The accompanying diagram
depicts the equivalent circuit of the LCD.
One additional consideration that must be taken into account is what happens when the
microcontroller enters a Power Down condition. The LCDEN control bit in the LEDCTRL
register permits the display to be powered off to reduce power consumption. If this bit is zero, the
driving signals to the display will cease, producing a blank display pattern but reducing any power
consumption associated with the LCD.
After Power-on, note that as the LCDEN bit will be cleared to zero, the display function will be
disabled. The accompanying timing diagrams depict the display driver signals generated by the
microcontroller for various values of duty and bias. The huge range of various permutations does
not permit all types to be displayed here.
LCD Panel Equivalent Circuit
Rev. 1.40
148
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
During Reset or in Power-down Mode
COM0� COM1� COM�� COM3
VA
VB
VC
V��
All seg�ent out�uts
VA
VB
VC
V��
1 F�a�e
Normal Operation Mode
COM0
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM1
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM�
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM3
VA
VB
VC
V��
All seg�ents OFF
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM0 seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM1 seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM� seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM3 seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM0� 1 seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM0� � seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
COM0� 3 seg�ents ON
VA
VB
VC
V��
(othe� co��inations a�e o�itted)
VA
VB
VC
V��
All seg�ents ON
LCD Driver Output – Type A -1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias
Rev. 1.40
149
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
VDDSPI Pin Function
As the SPI interfaces connect to external devices, the VDDSPI pin can be connected to the power
supply of external devices to ensure the correct I/O voltage level interfacing. As the VDDSPI pin is
pin-shared with other functions, it must be enabled as a VDDSPI pin using a bit in the VDDSPICR
register. The SPI interfaces can also use the device VDD or VOREG as their power supply, the
choice of which is implemented using bits in the VDDSPICR register.
VDDSPICR Register
Bit
7
6
Name VDDSPIC —
4
3
2
1
0
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Rev. 1.40
5
VDDSCK1 VDDSCK0 VDDSPI11 VDDSPI10 VDDSPI01 VDDSPI00
VDDSPIC: Select VDDSPI or PA7
0: I/O
1: VDDSPI
Bit 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5~4
VDDSCK1, VDDSCK0: INT1 and SCKO power supply select
00: VDD
01: VOREG
10: VDD
11: VDDSPI pin
Users must set the VDDSPIC bit to“1” when choosing the VDDSPI pin.
Bit 3~2
VDDSPI11, VDDSPI10: SPI1 power supply select 00: VDD 01: VOREG 10: VDD 11: VDDSPI
Users must set the VDDSPIC bit to “1” when choosing the VDDSPI pin.
Bit 1~0
VDDSPI01, VDDSPI00: SPI0 power supply select
00: VDD
01: VOREG
10: VDD
11: VDDSPI
Users must set the VDDSPIC bit to “1” when choosing the VDDSPI pin.
150
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Configuration Option
Configuration options refer to certain options within the MCU that are programmed into the device
during the programming process. During the development process, these options are selected using
the HT-IDE software development tools. As these options are programmed into the device using
the hardware programming tools, once they are selected they cannot be changed later using the
application program. All options must be defined for proper system function, the details of which are
shown in the table.
No.
Options
Oscillator Options
1
High Speed System Oscillator Selection − fH:
1. HXT
2. ERC
3. HIRC
2
Low Speed System Oscillator Selection − fSUB:
1. LXT
2. LIRC
3
WDT Clock Selection − fS:
1. fSUB
2. fSYS/4
Note: The fSUB and the fTBC clock source are LXT or LIRC selection by the fL configuration option.
Watchdog Options
4
CLR WDT Instructions Selection:
1. 1 instructions
2. 2 instructions
SPI Options
Rev. 1.40
5
WCOLn bit:
1. Enable
2. Disable
6
CSENn bit:
1. Enable
2. Disable
151
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Set
Introduction
Central to the successful operation of any microcontroller is its instruction set, which is a set of
program instruction codes that directs the microcontroller to perform certain operations. In the case
of Holtek microcontroller, a comprehensive and flexible set of over 60 instructions is provided to
enable programmers to implement their application with the minimum of programming overheads.
For easier understanding of the various instruction codes, they have been subdivided into several
functional groupings.
Instruction Timing
Most instructions are implemented within one instruction cycle. The exceptions to this are branch,
call, or table read instructions where two instruction cycles are required. One instruction cycle is
equal to 4 system clock cycles, therefore in the case of an 8MHz system oscillator, most instructions
would be implemented within 0.5μs and branch or call instructions would be implemented within
1μs. Although instructions which require one more cycle to implement are generally limited to
the JMP, CALL, RET, RETI and table read instructions, it is important to realize that any other
instructions which involve manipulation of the Program Counter Low register or PCL will also take
one more cycle to implement. As instructions which change the contents of the PCL will imply a
direct jump to that new address, one more cycle will be required. Examples of such instructions
would be "CLR PCL" or "MOV PCL, A". For the case of skip instructions, it must be noted that if
the result of the comparison involves a skip operation then this will also take one more cycle, if no
skip is involved then only one cycle is required.
Moving and Transferring Data
The transfer of data within the microcontroller program is one of the most frequently used
operations. Making use of three kinds of MOV instructions, data can be transferred from registers to
the Accumulator and vice-versa as well as being able to move specific immediate data directly into
the Accumulator. One of the most important data transfer applications is to receive data from the
input ports and transfer data to the output ports.
Arithmetic Operations
The ability to perform certain arithmetic operations and data manipulation is a necessary feature of
most microcontroller applications. Within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set are a range of
add and subtract instruction mnemonics to enable the necessary arithmetic to be carried out. Care
must be taken to ensure correct handling of carry and borrow data when results exceed 255 for
addition and less than 0 for subtraction. The increment and decrement instructions INC, INCA, DEC
and DECA provide a simple means of increasing or decreasing by a value of one of the values in the
destination specified.
Rev. 1.40
152
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Logical and Rotate Operation
The standard logical operations such as AND, OR, XOR and CPL all have their own instruction
within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set. As with the case of most instructions involving
data manipulation, data must pass through the Accumulator which may involve additional
programming steps. In all logical data operations, the zero flag may be set if the result of the
operation is zero. Another form of logical data manipulation comes from the rotate instructions such
as RR, RL, RRC and RLC which provide a simple means of rotating one bit right or left. Different
rotate instructions exist depending on program requirements. Rotate instructions are useful for serial
port programming applications where data can be rotated from an internal register into the Carry
bit from where it can be examined and the necessary serial bit set high or low. Another application
which rotate data operations are used is to implement multiplication and division calculations.
Branches and Control Transfer
Program branching takes the form of either jumps to specified locations using the JMP instruction
or to a subroutine using the CALL instruction. They differ in the sense that in the case of a
subroutine call, the program must return to the instruction immediately when the subroutine has
been carried out. This is done by placing a return instruction "RET" in the subroutine which will
cause the program to jump back to the address right after the CALL instruction. In the case of a JMP
instruction, the program simply jumps to the desired location. There is no requirement to jump back
to the original jumping off point as in the case of the CALL instruction. One special and extremely
useful set of branch instructions are the conditional branches. Here a decision is first made regarding
the condition of a certain data memory or individual bits. Depending upon the conditions, the
program will continue with the next instruction or skip over it and jump to the following instruction.
These instructions are the key to decision making and branching within the program perhaps
determined by the condition of certain input switches or by the condition of internal data bits.
Bit Operations
The ability to provide single bit operations on Data Memory is an extremely flexible feature of all
Holtek microcontrollers. This feature is especially useful for output port bit programming where
individual bits or port pins can be directly set high or low using either the "SET [m].i" or "CLR [m].
i" instructions respectively. The feature removes the need for programmers to first read the 8-bit
output port, manipulate the input data to ensure that other bits are not changed and then output the
port with the correct new data. This read-modify-write process is taken care of automatically when
these bit operation instructions are used.
Table Read Operations
Data storage is normally implemented by using registers. However, when working with large
amounts of fixed data, the volume involved often makes it inconvenient to store the fixed data in
the Data Memory. To overcome this problem, Holtek microcontrollers allow an area of Program
Memory to be setup as a table where data can be directly stored. A set of easy to use instructions
provides the means by which this fixed data can be referenced and retrieved from the Program
Memory.
Other Operations
In addition to the above functional instructions, a range of other instructions also exist such as
the "HALT" instruction for Power-down operations and instructions to control the operation of
the Watchdog Timer for reliable program operations under extreme electric or electromagnetic
environments. For their relevant operations, refer to the functional related sections.
Rev. 1.40
153
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Set Summary
The following table depicts a summary of the instruction set categorised according to function and
can be consulted as a basic instruction reference using the following listed conventions.
Table Conventions
x: Bits immediate data
m: Data Memory address
A: Accumulator
i: 0~7 number of bits
addr: Program memory address
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Add Data Memory to ACC
Add ACC to Data Memory
Add immediate data to ACC
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
Add ACC to Data memory with Carry
Subtract immediate data from the ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry, result in Data Memory
Decimal adjust ACC for Addition with result in Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1Note
1Note
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
C
1
1
1
1Note
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment Data Memory
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Decrement Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1Note
Z
Z
Z
Z
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
None
None
C
C
None
None
C
C
Arithmetic
ADD A,[m]
ADDM A,[m]
ADD A,x
ADC A,[m]
ADCM A,[m]
SUB A,x
SUB A,[m]
SUBM A,[m]
SBC A,[m]
SBCM A,[m]
DAA [m]
Logic Operation
AND A,[m]
OR A,[m]
XOR A,[m]
ANDM A,[m]
ORM A,[m]
XORM A,[m]
AND A,x
OR A,x
XOR A,x
CPL [m]
CPLA [m]
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Logical AND immediate Data to ACC
Logical OR immediate Data to ACC
Logical XOR immediate Data to ACC
Complement Data Memory
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment & Decrement
INCA [m]
INC [m]
DECA [m]
DEC [m]
Rotate
RRA [m]
RR [m]
RRCA [m]
RRC [m]
RLA [m]
RL [m]
RLCA [m]
RLC [m]
Rev. 1.40
154
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Move Data Memory to ACC
Move ACC to Data Memory
Move immediate data to ACC
1
1Note
1
None
None
None
Clear bit of Data Memory
Set bit of Data Memory
1Note
1Note
None
None
Jump unconditionally
Skip if Data Memory is zero
Skip if Data Memory is zero with data movement to ACC
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is zero
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Subroutine call
Return from subroutine
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
Return from interrupt
2
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
2
2
2
2
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Read table (specific page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
2Note
2Note
2Note
None
None
None
No operation
Clear Data Memory
Set Data Memory
Clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
Enter power down mode
1
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
1
None
None
None
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
None
None
TO, PDF
Data Move
MOV A,[m]
MOV [m],A
MOV A,x
Bit Operation
CLR [m].i
SET [m].i
Branch Operation
JMP addr
SZ [m]
SZA [m]
SZ [m].i
SNZ [m].i
SIZ [m]
SDZ [m]
SIZA [m]
SDZA [m]
CALL addr
RET
RET A,x
RETI
Table Read Operation
TABRD [m]
TABRDC [m]
TABRDL [m]
Miscellaneous
NOP
CLR [m]
SET [m]
CLR WDT
CLR WDT1
CLR WDT2
SWAP [m]
SWAPA [m]
HALT
Note: 1. For skip instructions, if the result of the comparison involves a skip then two cycles are required, if no
skip takes place only one cycle is required.
2. Any instruction which changes the contents of the PCL will also require 2 cycles for execution.
3. For the “CLR WDT1” and “CLR WDT2” instructions the TO and PDF flags may be affected by the
execution status. The TO and PDF flags are cleared after both “CLR WDT1” and “CLR WDT2”
instructions are consecutively executed. Otherwise the TO and PDF flags remain unchanged.
Rev. 1.40
155
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Definition
ADC A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC + [m] + C
OV, Z, AC, C
ADCM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add ACC to Data Memory with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC + [m] + C
OV, Z, AC, C
Add Data Memory to ACC
ADD A,[m]
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
Affected flag(s)
ACC ← ACC + [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
ADD A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add immediate data to ACC
The contents of the Accumulator and the specified immediate data are added. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC + x
OV, Z, AC, C
ADDM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add ACC to Data Memory
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC + [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
AND A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″AND″ [m]
Z
AND A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bit wise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″AND″ x
Z
ANDM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical AND
operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″AND″ [m]
Z
Rev. 1.40
156
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
CALL addr
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subroutine call
Unconditionally calls a subroutine at the specified address. The Program Counter then
increments by 1 to obtain the address of the next instruction which is then pushed onto the
stack. The specified address is then loaded and the program continues execution from this
new address. As this instruction requires an additional operation, it is a two cycle instruction.
Stack ← Program Counter + 1
Program Counter ← addr
None
CLR [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
[m] ← 00H
None
CLR [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear bit of Data Memory
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
[m].i ← 0
None
CLR WDT
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CLR WDT1
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in
conjunction with CLR WDT2 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT2 to have
effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT2 will
have no effect.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CLR WDT2
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction
with CLR WDT1 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT1 to have effect.
Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT1 will have no
effect.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CPL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Complement Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which
previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa.
[m] ← [m]
Z
Rev. 1.40
157
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
CPLA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which
previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa. The complemented result is stored in
the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m]
Z
DAA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decimal-Adjust ACC for addition with result in Data Memory
Convert the contents of the Accumulator value to a BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value
resulting from the previous addition of two BCD variables. If the low nibble is greater than 9
or if AC flag is set, then a value of 6 will be added to the low nibble. Otherwise the low nibble
remains unchanged. If the high nibble is greater than 9 or if the C flag is set, then a value of 6
will be added to the high nibble. Essentially, the decimal conversion is performed by adding
00H, 06H, 60H or 66H depending on the Accumulator and flag conditions. Only the C flag
may be affected by this instruction which indicates that if the original BCD sum is greater than
100, it allows multiple precision decimal addition.
[m] ← ACC + 00H or
[m] ← ACC + 06H or [m] ← ACC + 60H or
[m] ← ACC + 66H
C
DEC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decrement Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1.
[m] ← [m] − 1
Z
DECA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1. The result is stored in the
Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m] − 1
Z
HALT
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Enter power down mode
This instruction stops the program execution and turns off the system clock. The contents of the Data Memory and registers are retained. The WDT and prescaler are cleared. The power
down flag PDF is set and the WDT time-out flag TO is cleared.
TO ← 0
PDF ← 1
TO, PDF
INC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Increment Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1.
[m] ← [m] + 1
Z
INCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m] + 1
Z
Rev. 1.40
158
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
JMP addr
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Jump unconditionally
The contents of the Program Counter are replaced with the specified address. Program
execution then continues from this new address. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the new address is loaded, it is a two cycle instruction.
Program Counter ← addr
None
MOV A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move Data Memory to ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator.
ACC ← [m]
None
MOV A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move immediate data to ACC
The immediate data specified is loaded into the Accumulator.
ACC ← x
None
MOV [m],A
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move ACC to Data Memory
The contents of the Accumulator are copied to the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC
None
NOP
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
No operation
No operation is performed. Execution continues with the next instruction.
No operation
None
OR A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise
logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″OR″ [m]
Z
OR A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″OR″ x
Z
ORM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″OR″ [m]
Z
RET
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from subroutine
The Program Counter is restored from the stack. Program execution continues at the restored
address.
Program Counter ← Stack
None
Rev. 1.40
159
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
RET A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the Accumulator loaded with the specified immediate data. Program execution continues at the restored address.
Program Counter ← Stack
ACC ← x
None
RETI
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from interrupt
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the interrupts are re-enabled by setting the
EMI bit. EMI is the master interrupt global enable bit. If an interrupt was pending when the RETI instruction is executed, the pending Interrupt routine will be processed before returning to the main program.
Program Counter ← Stack
EMI ← 1
None
RL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0.
[m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
[m].0 ← [m].7
None
RLA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0.
The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain
unchanged.
ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
ACC.0 ← [m].7
None
RLC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7
replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 0.
[m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
[m].0 ← C
C ← [m].7
C
RLCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7 replaces the
Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into the bit 0. The rotated result is stored in the
Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
ACC.0 ← C
C ← [m].7
C
RR [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated into bit 7.
[m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
[m].7 ← [m].0
None
Rev. 1.40
160
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
RRA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0
rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the
Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
ACC.7 ← [m].0
None
RRC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0
replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7.
[m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
[m].7 ← C
C ← [m].0
C
RRCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
ACC.7 ← C
C ← [m].0
C
SBC A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are
subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is
positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − [m] − C
OV, Z, AC, C
SBCM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry and result in Data Memory
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
[m] ← ACC − [m] − C
OV, Z, AC, C
SDZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if decrement Data Memory is 0
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0 the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
[m] ← [m] − 1
Skip if [m]=0
None
Rev. 1.40
161
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SDZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0,
the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m] − 1
Skip if ACC=0
None
SET [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Set Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
[m] ← FFH
None
SET [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Set bit of Data Memory
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
[m].i ← 1
None
SIZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if increment Data Memory is 0
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the
following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program
proceeds with the following instruction.
[m] ← [m] + 1
Skip if [m]=0
None
SIZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified
Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not
0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m] + 1
Skip if ACC=0
None
SNZ [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not 0
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is not 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this
requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m].i ≠ 0
None
SUB A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
Rev. 1.40
162
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
SUBM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
[m] ← ACC − [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
SUB A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract immediate data from ACC
The immediate data specified by the code is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − x
OV, Z, AC, C
SWAP [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged.
[m].3~[m].0 ↔ [m].7~[m].4
None
SWAPA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.3~ACC.0 ← [m].7~[m].4
ACC.7~ACC.4 ← [m].3~[m].0
None
SZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if Data Memory is 0
If the contents of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m]=0
None
SZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if Data Memory is 0 with data movement to ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator. If the value is zero, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m]
Skip if [m]=0
None
SZ [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is 0
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires
the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle
instruction. If the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m].i=0
None
Rev. 1.40
163
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
TABRD [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (specific page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (specific page) addressed by the table pointer pair (TBHP and TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
TABRDC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (current page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
TABRDL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (last page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
XOR A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ [m]
Z
XORM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″XOR″ [m]
Z
XOR A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ x
Z
Rev. 1.40
164
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Package Information
Note that the package information provided here is for consultation purposes only. As this
information may be updated at regular intervals users are reminded to consult the Holtek website for
the latest version of the package information.
Additional supplementary information with regard to packaging is listed below. Click on the relevant
section to be transferred to the relevant website page.
• Further Package Information (include Outline Dimensions, Product Tape and Reel Specifications)
• Packing Meterials Information
• Carton information
Rev. 1.40
165
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
64-pin LQFP (7mm × 7mm) Outline Dimensions
Symbol
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
0.354 BSC
—
B
—
0.276 BSC
—
C
—
0.354 BSC
—
D
—
0.276 BSC
—
E
—
0.016 BSC
—
F
0.005
0.007
0.009
G
0.053
0.055
0.057
H
—
—
0.063
I
0.002
—
0.006
J
0.018
0.024
0.030
K
0.004
—
0.008
α
0°
—
7°
Symbol
Rev. 1.40
Dimensions in inch
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
9.0 BSC
—
B
—
7.0 BSC
—
C
—
9.0 BSC
—
D
—
7.0 BSC
—
E
—
0.4 BSC
—
F
0.13
0.18
0.23
G
1.35
1.40
1.45
H
—
—
1.60
I
0.05
—
0.15
J
0.45
0.60
0.75
K
0.09
—
0.20
α
0°
—
7°
166
September 27, 2015
HT45F3W
R-Type Blood Pressure Meter 8-Bit Flash MCU
Copyright© 2015 by HOLTEK SEMICONDUCTOR INC.
The information appearing in this Data Sheet is believed to be accurate at the time
of publication. However, Holtek assumes no responsibility arising from the use of
the specifications described. The applications mentioned herein are used solely
for the purpose of illustration and Holtek makes no warranty or representation that
such applications will be suitable without further modification, nor recommends
the use of its products for application that may present a risk to human life due to
malfunction or otherwise. Holtek's products are not authorized for use as critical
components in life support devices or systems. Holtek reserves the right to alter
its products without prior notification. For the most up-to-date information, please
visit our web site at http://www.holtek.com.tw.
Rev. 1.40
167
September 27, 2015